JP2019130130A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: In circulation of game balls in a circulation mode most advantageous to a player, when a game machine sets a probability of continuous entry of game balls into first class ball entry means to a first type ball entry means continuous ball entry probability, sets a probability of alternate entry of game balls into the first class ball entry means and second class ball entry means to an alternate ball entry means, and sets a probability of continuous entry into the second class ball entry means to a second class ball entry means continuous ball entry probability, control is performed such that the first class ball entry means continuous ball entry probability is switchable to a first game state higher than the alternate ball entry probability and the second class ball entry means continuous ball entry probability, the alternate ball entry probability is switchable to a second game state higher than the first class ball entry means continuous ball entry probability and the second class ball entry means continuous ball entry probability, and the second class ball entry means continuous ball entry probability is switchable to a third game state higher than the first class ball entry means continuous ball entry probability and the alternate ball entry probability.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, etc. for the purpose of improving the fun of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, etc. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as production (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

  In the gaming machines as described above, for the purpose of improving the fun of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, providing a more healthy game, etc. Improvement of technology is desired.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following forms.

[Mode] (This mode is mainly based on the following second embodiment)
A first type of ball entry means for entering a game ball, which triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type of ball entry means that triggers a change in a second symbol different from the first symbol in which a game ball enters;
Control means for controlling the gaming state;
With
The control means includes
When a game ball is distributed in a distribution manner that is most advantageous to the player, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the first type entry means is the first type entry means continuous entry probability, and the game ball Is the probability of alternately entering the first-type entrance means and the second-type entrance means, and the probability of the game ball entering the second-type entrance means is second. In the case of the seed entry means continuous entry probability,
A first gaming state in which the first-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the alternate entry probability and the second-type entry means continuous entry probability;
A second gaming state in which the alternate entrance probability is higher than the first type entrance means continuous entrance probability and the second type entrance means continuous entrance probability;
A third gaming state in which the second-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the first-type entry means continuous entry probability and the alternate entry probability;
A gaming machine comprising game state switching means for controlling the game to be switchable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above form, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as a 1st embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the various counters used for winning lottery. It is explanatory drawing explaining the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the allocation table set to the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows centering around the electrical structure of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows a 1st starting port and its periphery. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail | claw and a 1st starting port. It is explanatory drawing which shows a prior art example. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail with which the pachinko machine of the modification 1 is equipped, and a 1st starting port. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail with which the pachinko machine of the modification 2 is equipped, and a 1st starting port. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail and 1st start port with which the pachinko machine of the modification 3 is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail and 1st starting port with which the pachinko machine of the modification 4 is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail with which the pachinko machine of the modification 5 is equipped, and a 1st starting port. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail and 1st starting port with which the pachinko machine of the modification 6 is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pair of nail | claw with which the pachinko machine of the modification 7 is equipped, and a 1st starting port. It is a perspective view which shows a pair of nail | claw with which the pachinko machine of the modification 8 is equipped, and a 1st starting port. It is a perspective view which shows a pair of nail | claw with which the pachinko machine of the modification 9 is equipped, and a 1st starting port. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a first start port in Modification 9. It is a perspective view which shows the electric accessory with which the pachinko machine of the modification 10 is equipped, and its periphery. It is a perspective view which shows the electric accessory with which the pachinko machine of the modification 11 is equipped, and its periphery. It is a front view which shows the 1st movable piece of the electrically-driven accessory with which the pachinko machine of the modification 12 is equipped. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment. 2 is a front view of a game board 30. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the distribution mechanism. It is explanatory drawing explaining the normal electric accessory 53. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface 41a which are variably displayed in the liquid crystal display device. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for winning lottery. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 1st start openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 2nd starting openings. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the allocation table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table (Electrical character release lottery success / failure table) used when performing an electrical accessory release lottery. It is explanatory drawing explaining the kind of support mode which the pachinko machine 10 can perform. It is explanatory drawing explaining the aspect which a game ball distribute | circulates at the time of execution of low frequency support mode. It is explanatory drawing explaining the aspect which a game ball distribute | circulates at the time of execution of high frequency support mode A. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the aspect which a game ball distribute | circulates at the time of execution of high frequency support mode B. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game in the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance process for start ports. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot and reach information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball entry process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variation time. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flowchart which shows a power combination opening / closing process. 3 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. It is a flowchart which shows a state memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for support mode production. It is a flowchart which shows the process for game times production. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an effect pattern. 4 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. 4 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 ordinary electric accessory 53 and each starting port in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in the modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in the modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 electric motor accessory 53 in a modification 2, and each starting port. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in the modification 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in the modification 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 3, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in the modification 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in the modification 3. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 4, the normal electric accessory 53, and each starting port. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 5, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in the modification 5. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in the modification 5. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 6, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode A in the modification 6. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the high frequency support mode B in the modification 6. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a structure of the normal electric accessory 53. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a setting process of a variation time in Modification 12. It is a flowchart which shows the variable time setting process for low frequency support modes. It is a flowchart which shows the change time setting process for high frequency support mode A. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time setting process for high frequency support mode B. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the production pattern in the modification 12. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for low frequency support modes. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode A. It is explanatory drawing explaining the production | presentation pattern in the 1st start opening game times of high frequency support mode A. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the continuous production in the 1st start opening game times of high frequency support mode A. It is explanatory drawing explaining the production | presentation pattern in the 2nd start opening game times of high frequency support mode A. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode B.

Embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Application to other configurations:
D. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc.

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as a first embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17.

  An opened window portion 18 is formed at a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by lighting or blinking at each game time, a big win winning, a reach occurrence or the like performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent out from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for a player to perform an input operation for a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  On the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front (hereinafter also simply referred to as “right side”), an operation handle 25 for operation by the player is provided. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the game ball launching by the game ball launching mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and the operation handle 25 Is provided with a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the first and second rotations based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “left side”), a game ball launch button 26 for operation by the player is provided. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched to the front of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same launch intensity as when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front, and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called “right strike”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired on the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to release the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, a third control unit 53, and a power supply unit 58. Specifically, these units are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function for controlling the main control of the game. The main control board is accommodated in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the liquid crystal display device based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90. The liquid crystal display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays images for design and production.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction for launching the game ball is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 launches the game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope that is gently inclined so that the game balls are connected to the lower side of the tank 54 and flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a vertical position, a case rail 56 connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55 in the vertical direction, a supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

  The power supply unit 58 includes a power supply device 85 and a power switch 88. The power supply device 85 supplies power necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10. A power switch 88 is connected to the power supply device 85. By the ON / OFF operation of the power switch 88, a supply state in which power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a non-supply state in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 are switched.

  Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is composed of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided to the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted with respect to the game board 30 and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. The nails 42 and the windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The game balls that have entered each of the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are placed in the individual openings described above formed in the gaming board 30. Be guided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special map unit 37, a universal map unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  As shown in the figure, the general prize opening 32 is a ball opening member that forms a ball opening through which a game ball can enter and is provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 (FIG. 2) as prize balls.

  The first start port 33 is a entrance member that forms an entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first start port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a jackpot lottery described later is executed.

  The second start port 34 is a entrance member that forms an entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery described later is executed. In addition, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

  The through gate 35 includes a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as an opportunity for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electrical instrument release lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to an open state where the electric combination 34a is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through the second start port 34 and is second. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In this embodiment, even when a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an open / close door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (winning lottery) by the main controller 60, when the jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b repeats an open state and a closed state in which game balls can be won. The opening / closing execution mode shifts to the case where a win is won as a result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by a winning at the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the open / close door 36b is in an open state. This mode repeats the closed state. That is, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning at the first starting port 33, when the big winning is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the winning at the big winning port 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. Similarly, as a result of the winning lottery based on the winning at the second starting port 34, even when a big win is won, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode in which the winning at the big winning port 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as winning balls.

  An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, or the variable winning device 36 are out. The game area PA is discharged through the mouth 43.

  The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The 1st symbol display part 37a and the 2nd symbol display part 37b are respectively comprised by the segment indicator by which the some segment light emission part was arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect.

  When a winning lottery triggered by a winning at the first start port 33 is performed, the first symbol display unit 37a displays a variable display or a display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  When a winning lottery triggered by winning a prize at the second starting port 34 is performed, the second symbol display unit 37b displays a variable display or a display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display part 37c and a second hold display part 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display part 37a and the second symbol display part 37b. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are put on hold. The 1st reservation display part 37c displays the number of reservations of the 1st starting port 33 with the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four game balls that are won in the second start opening 34 are put on hold. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of hold of the second start port 34 according to the color or combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

  The universal map unit 38 includes a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electrification opening release lottery triggered by winning a prize to the through gate 35 is performed, the universal map unit 38 displays a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display as a display form of the light emitting display. When the electrification opening lottery is completed, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is an open / close door until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a variable winning device 36. It is a game that continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

  The special map unit 37, the universal map unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light-emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, You may be comprised by the various display apparatus which can show a lottery result and a lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The liquid crystal display device 41 may be replaced with various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  When the first symbol display unit 37a performs variation display or predetermined display based on a winning to the first start port 33, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs symbol variation display or predetermined display accordingly. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variation display or predetermined display based on a winning at the second start port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs symbol variation display or predetermined display accordingly. . The liquid crystal display device 41 performs not only a display effect triggered by entering the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also a display effect during the opening / closing execution mode that shifts when a big win is won. . Details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described below.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and display surfaces 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 in a variable manner. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design by which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows the numbers 1-8 as a symbol which is variably displayed.

  FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom or from below. A variable display that scrolls up is displayed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display ends and the display is stopped, if the winning lottery result by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the above-described mode, but the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol rows, the symbols of each symbol row Various modes can be adopted as the mode of the variable display of symbols such as the number.

  Here, “game times” refers to the period from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b until the variable display ends and becomes the stop display, and the stop display ends. In other words, this is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol is obtained for each game. In any one of the display units 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs a predetermined operation every game. After the symbol string is variably displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game time is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is a time from when the variable display is started until a predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is a time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. Yes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on winning in the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on winning in the second start port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls won in the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is up to four each.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a pair of nails (so-called life nails, navel nails) 42 (42 a, 42 b) are provided above the first start port 33. The probability of entering a game ball into the first start port 33 varies depending on the distance between the pair of nails 42a and 42b.

A2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured with the main control device 60 as a center, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the program recorded in the ROM 63 is executed. In addition, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the functions of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 e, a payout control device 70, and a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a power supply of DC stable 24V from the power supply device 85. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power.

  The power supply device 85 includes a power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power failure monitoring circuit 86 outputs a power failure information signal when a power failure occurs by monitoring the power supply. “When a power failure occurs” is not limited to when a commercial power failure occurs, but also includes when the power switch 88 is switched from the on state to the off state (when the power is off).

  In addition, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e at various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. Connected to a plurality of detection sensors. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entrance based on signals from various detection sensors 67a to 67e, It is determined whether or not 35 has been passed. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 and executes an electric accessory release lottery based on the entrance to the through gate 35. To do.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the second start port 34, The main display unit 45 is connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuit.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed. Further, when the electrification opening is selected as a result of the electrification opening release lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electrification accessory driving unit 34b so that the electrification accessory 34a is opened. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45. When the jackpot type is determined in the opening / closing execution mode and the number of round games to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode is determined, display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is executed.

  Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the player enters the general winning opening 32, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the first starting hole 33 is inserted. Is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a win to the second starting port 34 is specified, one game ball is paid out. A corresponding prize ball command is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize ball.

  A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 performs launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. In addition, an operation handle 25 and a game ball launch button 26 are connected to the launch control device 80.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14 and driving control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. In addition, an effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. Various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control apparatus 100, etc. are controlled.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. The presence / absence of the reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the notice effect executed at each game round, etc. are grasped. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time which is the time required for one game time is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 45, setting the symbol display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a big hit random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. A reach random number counter C3 is used for reach lottery to determine whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is shifted and changed.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C5 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C5 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b. The holding information storage area 64b includes a first holding area Ra, a second holding area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total holding number storage area. When game balls sequentially win the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time of winning are time-sequentially in the hold information storage area 64b. Stored in

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 599 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first hold area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 34. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table in the success / failure table storage area 63a (FIG. 5) of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery modes for the winning lottery. The high probability mode is a gaming state that is started by winning a winning jackpot, and has a relatively higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than in the low probability mode. FIG. 7A shows a success / failure table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a success / failure table for the high probability. As shown in FIG. 7A, under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, the value of the random number that wins the big winning is 15. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, the value of the random number for winning the big winning is 30. In addition, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described next. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining jackpot types such as probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 29 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the first hold area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball is won at the first start port 33, and the hold information at the timing when the game ball is won at the second start port 34. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing a difference in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery lottery mode after completion of opening / closing execution mode (3) Electric charge 34a of second start port 34 after opening / closing execution mode ends Support mode

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (1) opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until it becomes a piece. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b. Can be set to continue until there are six.

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one opening / closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open / close door 36b is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

  Note that the number of opening / closing of the open / close door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are the winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the occurrence frequency is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the open / close door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the configuration may be such that the variable winning device 36 is not substantially won in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes a high probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a high probability mode winning / failing table as a winning / notifying table as a mode of the winning lottery mode after the end of the above-described (2) opening / closing execution mode; And a low probability mode in which a winning lottery is performed using a low probability mode success / failure table. As described with reference to FIG. 7, winning a lottery is better when a winning lottery is performed using a high probability winning / failing table than when a winning lottery is performed using a low probability winning / failing table. The probability of doing is high.

  The pachinko machine 10 continues to emit game balls in a similar manner to the game area PA as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 after the end of the above (3) opening / closing execution mode. When the comparison is made in the situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are such that the frequency at which the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high. Can be set.

  Specifically, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode have the same probability of winning a power combination opening lot in the electric component opening lottery using the electric component opening counter C5, but in the high frequency support mode, The number of times that the electric utility item 34a is in the open state when the electrification release is won may be set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the one open time may be set longer. In addition, in the case where the electrification opening is elected in the high frequency support mode and the opening state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state until the next opening state is started is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric actor release lottery is performed after the first electric agent release lottery than in the low-frequency support mode. May be.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize at the second start port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize at the first start port 33 is higher than that at the second start port 34. However, in the high frequency support mode, the first start port 33 is connected to the second start port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning at the second starting port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls. Can do.

  In addition, the configuration in which the high frequency support mode is set to have a higher frequency of being in the power release state per unit time than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming a winning combination winning. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of securing times to be secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed, in the high frequency support mode, the frequency is low. It may be set so that a shorter securing time is more easily selected than the support mode or the average securing time is shortened. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the first electric character releasing lottery is shortened, Even if the advantage of the high frequency support mode is increased by applying any one or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reservation time and increasing the winning probability Good.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be set with a plurality of types of jackpots. In the present embodiment, when a big win is won in the winning lottery, a plurality of types of jackpots are distributed using the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type allocation destination corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the allocation table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the sorting table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second start port.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the first start port 33, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R normal A jackpot, 8R normal jackpot is set.

  In the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot, the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode for winning lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends (hereinafter simply referred to as “lottery mode”). Is also a high probability mode, and the support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is a big hit that becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the low probability mode, and the open / close execution mode It is a big hit that the support mode after the end becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 5” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “6 to 23” corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. “24 to 27” corresponds to 16R normal jackpot, and “28 to 39” corresponds to 8R normal jackpot. For this reason, in this embodiment, the probability of a probable jackpot is 60 percent of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, and the probability of a normal jackpot is the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”. 40% of the value of. Note that the number and value of the random numbers won in the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the jackpot type. Therefore, the mode of jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest in the 16R probability variable jackpot, the next highest in the 8R probability variable jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. Thus, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the second start port 34, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second start port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 12” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “13 to 23” corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. “24-30” corresponds to 16R normal jackpot, and “31-39” corresponds to 8R normal jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is based on the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning to the first start port 33, and the second This is different from the case where a big win is won based on the winning at the start opening 34. In the present embodiment, in the case of winning a jackpot based on winning at the second start opening 34, the probability of a promising big hit is 60%, and the probability of a normal jackpot is 40%. Probability is the same as when winning a jackpot based on winning a prize, but the probability of 16R and 8R allocation being 16R higher than when winning a jackpot based on winning at the first start port 33 It has become. Note that the number and value of the random numbers won in the jackpot are arbitrary, and other configurations may be adopted.

  As described above, the jackpot type distribution mode between the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Accordingly, the player plays the game while expecting that a winning of the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 will occur at the second start port 34. In addition, when it becomes a losing result in the success / failure lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not shifted, and the lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. In addition, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop the segment display unit to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. The display mode is determined. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described next. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and at the timing when the game ball wins the second start port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, and is then stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The table is checked to determine whether or not to generate reach. However, if the winning lottery results in winning the jackpot and shifting to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach means that for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, a combination of symbols for which a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot may be established is stopped. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in the state of the remaining symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z2 is subjected to the variable display of the symbol, thereby reaching a reach. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state that the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when the reach effect is being performed, or prior to the reach display, it is determined whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. May be.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and when the variation of the symbol is started by the liquid crystal display device 41. In determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, a variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C5 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C5 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 249, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. The electric accessory release counter C5 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C5. For example, if C5 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C5 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in a closed state.

  Note that a combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra corresponds to the hold information related to the first start port 33, and the second hold area. A combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in Rb corresponds to the hold information related to the second start port 34, and these hold information is special in the present invention. It corresponds to information.

A3. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 (FIG. 5) are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in part of the ROM 93 area. Details of these will be described later.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in part of the RAM 94 area. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 and the rendering operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92 and a display control device 100 is connected.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control apparatus 100 includes an MPU 102 which is a chip in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the image data.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 106. Further, it is possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, the main side ROM 63, and the main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are respectively referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side. The ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

A4. 1st starting port and life nail configuration:
FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the first start port 33 and its periphery. In the figure, the X-axis positive direction indicates the right side of the game board 30 when viewed from the front, the Y-axis positive direction indicates the upper side of the game board 30, and the Z-axis positive direction indicates the front side of the game board 30. That is, the X-axis direction indicates the right / left direction of the game board 30 as viewed from the front, the Y-axis direction indicates the up / down direction of the game board 30, and the Z-axis direction indicates the front / rear direction of the game board 30. The X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis are three axes that are orthogonal to each other. Hereinafter, the X-axis positive direction is referred to as “+ X direction”, the X-axis negative direction is referred to as “−X direction”, the Y-axis positive direction is referred to as “+ Y direction”, and the Y-axis negative direction is referred to as “−Y direction”. The Z-axis positive direction is called “+ Z direction”, and the Z-axis negative direction is called “−Z direction”.

  The first start port 33 is configured by a ball entrance member that forms a ball entrance 33a into which a game ball can enter. Specifically, the first start port 33 has a hollow box shape, a ball entrance 33a is formed on the surface on the + Y direction side, and penetrates the game board 30 in the front-rear direction on the surface on the −Z direction side. A ball outlet 33b communicating with an opening (not shown) is formed. A game ball that has entered from the entrance 33a is discharged from the exit 33b through the first start port 33 and sent to an opening that penetrates the game board 30 in the front-rear direction. The first start port 33 is configured by a translucent resin member.

  As described above, the pair of nails 42 is implanted above the first start port 33. Hereinafter, the nail on the + X direction side of the pair of nails 42 is referred to as a “first nail 42a”, and the nail on the −X direction side of the pair of nails 42 is referred to as a “second nail 42b”.

  Each nail 42 included in the pachinko machine 10 including the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b has a substantially hemispherical head 421 and a substantially cylindrical body 422. For example, it is integrally formed of a brass material. The trunk portion 422 extends straight, has a sharp tip, and has a helical thread groove 422s (see FIG. 11) formed on a part of the outer peripheral surface. Since the nail 42 is driven into the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 up to the screw groove 422s, it is difficult for the nail 42 to be removed from the game board 30 due to an impact even if the game ball collides. Each nail 42 is driven by an automatic nailer. At least a part of each nail 42 may be configured such that its inclination is adjusted as necessary after being driven by an automatic nail driver.

  At least at the manufacturer's shipping stage, each nail 42 is generally perpendicular to the plywood 30a. Specifically, the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first start port 33 are at a slight angle θ1 with respect to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a, that is, the + Z-axis direction. , Θ2 is inclined. The reason why the inclination angle of at least some of the nails 42 including the first nails 42a and the second nails 42b is determined is to match the ball exit rate and the winning rate to the design values. Next, the inclination angles of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b will be described in detail.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 42 a and 42 b and a first start port 33. 11A is a cross-sectional view taken along line 1-1 in FIG. 10, and FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view taken along line 2-2 in FIG. That is, FIG. 11A shows a case where the first and second nails 42a and 42b and the first starting port 33 are viewed from the + Y direction side (upper side) toward the −Y direction side (lower side) ( Hereinafter, it is simply referred to as “when viewed from above”. FIG. 11B shows a case where the pair of nails 42a and 42b and the first start port 33 are viewed from the + X direction side (right side) to the −X direction side (left side) (hereinafter, simply “viewed from the right side”). FIG. In FIG. 11 (b), the second nail 42b located on the left side is hidden behind the first nail 42a located on the right side and cannot be seen.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when viewed from the upper side, the first nail 42a positioned on the right side has a center axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 as viewed from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is provided so as to be inclined to the right side (+ X direction) by the first angle θ1. In terms of general angles, the first nail 42a is provided so as to be inclined by + θ1 (θ1 counterclockwise) with respect to the + Z direction.

  In general, the pachinko machine 10 is subjected to a device performance test, and the devices manufactured in the same model are generally allowed to have the same performance and are permitted to be installed in each pachinko parlor. The first angle θ1 is a predetermined angle that is determined in advance, and in the present embodiment, is an angle when the type certification test is passed. The first angle θ1 is, for example, any value from 1 degree to 10 degrees, and is, for example, 5 degrees in the present embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, the first nail 42a is provided along an XZ plane parallel to the X axis and the Z axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the first nail 42a is provided along the Z-axis direction.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when viewed from the upper side, the second nail 42b located on the left side has a center axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 as viewed from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is provided so as to be inclined to the left side (−X direction) by the second angle θ2. In terms of general angles, the second nail 42b is provided so as to be inclined by −θ2 (θ2 clockwise) with respect to the + Z direction. The second angle θ2 is a predetermined angle that is determined in advance. In the present embodiment, the second angle θ2 is an angle when the type certification test is passed. The second angle θ2 is, for example, any value from 1 degree to 10 degrees, and is, for example, 5 degrees in the present embodiment. In addition, although 1st angle (theta) 1 and 2nd angle (theta) 2 are equal in this embodiment, it may replace and may differ. The first angle θ <b> 1 and the second angle θ <b> 2 are angles intended at the manufacturer's shipping stage.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11B, the second nail 42b is provided along the XZ plane parallel to the X axis and the Z axis. That is, when viewed from the right side, the second nail 42b is provided along the Z-axis direction.

  As a result of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b being inclined as described above, as shown in FIG. 11 (a), there is a gap between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b. Is gradually increased from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side).

  The entrance 33a of the first starter 33 is an opening along the XZ plane, and has a trapezoidal shape as shown in FIG. Specifically, a first edge (edge) 331 corresponding to one of a pair of parallel opposite sides constituting the trapezoid, and a second edge 332 corresponding to the other of the pair of opposite sides, The entrance 33a is formed by a third edge 333 corresponding to one of the opposite sides of the other set constituting the trapezoid and a fourth edge 334 corresponding to the other of the opposite sides of the other set. Composed. The first edge 331 and the second edge 332 are parallel to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 (that is, along the X-axis direction), and the first edge 331 is the entrance 33a. The second edge 332 is located on the −Z direction side of the entrance 33a. The third edge 333 is located on the + X direction side of the entrance 33a, and the fourth edge 334 is located on the −X direction side of the entrance 33a. The first to fourth edges 331 to 334 can also be said to be inner slopes of the entrance 33a when measuring the inner law.

  In the present embodiment, the length of the first edge 331 is longer than the length of the second edge 332. When the angle on the + X direction side of the two inner angles at both ends of the second edge 332 is δ1, and the angle on the −X direction side of the two inner angles is δ2, δ1 and δ2 are as follows: (1) and (2) are satisfied.

δ1 = θ1 + 90 degrees (1)
δ2 = θ2 + 90 degrees (2)
However, (theta) 1 is an inclination angle of the 1st nail 42a mentioned above, (theta) 2 is an inclination angle of the 2nd nail 42b mentioned above.

  According to Equation (1), it can be seen that the third edge 333 is configured such that the direction relative to the end on the −Z direction side is inclined from the + Z direction to the right side (+ X direction) by the first angle θ1. . According to Equation (2), the fourth edge 334 is configured such that the direction with respect to the end on the −Z direction side is inclined by the second angle θ2 from the + Z direction to the left side (−X direction). I understand. The distance (width) between the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 at the entrance 33a gradually increases from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side). Yes.

  Therefore, the first and second nails 42a and 42b and the entrance 33a of the first starting port 33 have the third edge 333 formed by the body 422 of the first nail 42a when viewed from above. The fourth edge 334 is parallel to the central axis direction of the trunk portion 422 of the second nail 42b. In other words, the third edge 333 has an inclination angle of the first nail 42a, that is, an angle formed by the first nail 42a and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, a direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a) The angle between the second nail 42b and the angle between the second nail 42b and the surface of the plywood 30a (more specifically, the surface of the plywood 30a). The angle formed by the perpendicular direction of

A5. Effects of Embodiment The first nail 42a and the second nail 42b provided above the first start port 33 are inclined by an unintended external factor such as an accidental impact during transportation. The condition may be different from the size intended by the manufacturer.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional example. In the conventional example, the same first nail 42a as in the first embodiment is used. As described above, the first nail 42a is inclined by the first angle θ1 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+ X direction) at the time of shipment. A first start port P33 is provided below the first nail 42a (−Y direction), as in the first embodiment. The first starting port P33 is different from the first starting port 33 of the first embodiment in that the entrance P33a is rectangular. That is, in the conventional example, the third edge P93 of the entrance P33a is parallel to the direction (Z-axis direction) perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, the inclination of the first nail 42a changes from the time of shipment, for example, as shown by the broken line (42a ') in the figure due to an accidental impact during transportation or due to secular change. There was a case. In that case, the repair person needs to return to the first angle θ which is an angle at the time of shipment. However, it is difficult for the repairer to grasp how much the first angle θ is tilted from the pachinko machine in which the tilt of the nail has changed. It imposes a lot of adjustment experience and the use of dedicated adjustment equipment.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the entrance 33a of the first starter 33 is matched with the inclination of the nails 42a and 42b intended by the manufacturer, which is the angle at the time of shipment. The directions of the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 are predetermined. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 10, the first nail 42a is connected to the third edge 333 when viewed from the top with the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 at the entrance 33a. By checking and correcting the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b so that the second nail 42b is parallel to the fourth edge 334 so that it is parallel, the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b is adjusted by the manufacturer. It can be easily returned to the intended inclination. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclinations of the first and second nails 42a and 42b without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail 42 and a dedicated adjustment tool.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first and second are made using the entrance 33a of the original first start port 33 without separately providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nails 42a and 42b can be repaired, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming complicated.

  As a modification of the first embodiment, the third edge 333 that defines the inclination angle of the first nail 42a and the fourth edge 334 that defines the inclination angle of the second nail 42b, May be configured to be colored with different colors. According to this configuration, the repairer easily recognizes that the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 serve as a reference for repairing the inclination of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b. Can do.

A6. Modification of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are possible. In the modification described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those in the above embodiment is omitted.

A6-1. Modification 1:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 1 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the inclination direction of the life nail and the shape of the entrance opening formed in the first start opening. The remaining configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine according to the first modification, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a pair of nails 542a and 542b and a first start port 533 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the first modification. FIG. 13A is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the upper side. FIG.13 (b) is a figure corresponding to FIG.11 (b) in 1st Embodiment, and is the figure seen from the right side.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the distance (width) between the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b is from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (+ Z direction side). The structure gradually widened toward. On the other hand, in the first modification, as shown in FIG. 13, the distance (width) between the first nail 542a and the second nail 542b is changed from the rear side (−Z direction side) to the front side (−Z direction side). It gradually becomes narrower toward the (+ Z direction side). Specifically, in the first nail 542a located on the right side, the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is the first angle φ1 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the left side (−X direction). It is provided in an inclined direction. The second nail 542b located on the left side is such that the central axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 is inclined by the second angle φ2 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+ X direction). Is provided. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are predetermined angles that are determined in advance, and in this embodiment, are angles when the type certification test is passed. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are values of, for example, 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees. The first angle φ1 and the second angle φ2 are equal, but may be different instead.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, the distance (width) between the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 in the entrance 33 a formed at the first start port 33 is the rear. The configuration gradually widened from the side (−Z direction side) toward the front side (+ Z direction side). On the other hand, in the first modification, as shown in FIG. 13, the distance (broadness) between the third edge 593 and the fourth edge 594 in the entrance 533 a formed in the first start port 533. ) Gradually decreases from the rear side (−Z direction side) toward the front side (+ Z direction side). Specifically, the third edge 593 located on the right side has a configuration in which the direction relative to the end on the −Z direction side is inclined by the first angle φ1 from the + Z direction to the left side (−X direction). Yes. The fourth edge 594 located on the left side is configured such that the direction with respect to the end on the −Z direction side is inclined by the second angle φ2 from the + Z direction to the right side (+ X direction).

  Therefore, also in the pachinko machine according to the first modification, the first and second nails 542a and nail 542b and the entrance 533a of the first start port 533 are the first of the entrance 533a when viewed from above. The third edge 593 is parallel to the central axis direction of the trunk part 422 of the first nail 542a, and the fourth edge 594 is parallel to the central axis direction of the trunk part 422 of the second nail 542b.

  According to the pachinko machine of Modification 1 configured as described above, as with the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, relying on the third edge 593 and the fourth edge 594 at the entrance 533a, When viewed from above, each nail 542a, 542b is inclined so that the first nail 542a is parallel to the third edge 593 and the second nail 542b is parallel to the fourth edge 594. Can be confirmed and corrected. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the deviation in inclination of the first and second nails 542a and 542b without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjusting tool.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine of the first modification, like the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the original first start opening 33 of the first start opening 33 can be provided without providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired using the entrance 33a, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-2. Modification 2:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 2 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the inclination direction of the life nail and the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration is the same. It is. In the pachinko machine according to the second modification, the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is denoted by the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

  FIG. 14 is a view showing a pair of nails 642a and 642b and a first start port 633 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the second modification. FIG. 14A is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the upper side. FIG.14 (b) is a figure corresponding to FIG.11 (b) in 1st Embodiment, and is the figure seen from the right side.

  In the first embodiment and the first modification, the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b are arranged such that the center axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 is the positive axis of the X axis from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). Or it was the structure which inclines in the negative direction (right-left side). On the other hand, in the modified example 2, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are arranged such that the central axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 is the positive Z axis from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). It was set as the structure which inclines in the direction (upper side). Specifically, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are along the Z axis as shown in FIG. 14A when viewed from the upper side, and when viewed from the right side as shown in FIG. ), The central axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 is provided so as to be inclined by a predetermined angle μ1 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+ Y direction). The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined angle that is determined in advance. In the present embodiment, the predetermined angle μ1 is an angle when the type certification test is passed. The predetermined angle μ1 is a predetermined angle that is determined in advance. In the present embodiment, the predetermined angle μ1 is an angle when the type certification test is passed. The predetermined angle μ1 is, for example, any value from 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees.

  In 1st Embodiment and the modification 1, the entrance 33a formed in the 1st starting port 33 was trapezoid shape. On the other hand, in the modified example 2, as shown in FIG. 14A, the ball entrance 633a formed in the first start port 633 has a rectangular shape. For this reason, the third edge 693 and the fourth edge 694 on the + X direction side and the −X direction side constituting the entrance 633a are configured along the + Z direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 14 (b), the upper side (+ Y direction side) 633S of the first start port 633 is on the upper side from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) with reference to the end 633b in contact with the plywood 30a. It is configured to be inclined by a predetermined angle μ1 in the (+ Y direction).

  For this reason, in the pachinko machine according to the second modification, when viewed from the right side, the center axis direction of each body portion 422 of the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b is the entrance of the first start port 633. It is parallel to the upper surface 633S of 633a.

  In the pachinko machine according to the second modified example configured as described above, the inclination angle of the upper surface 633S of the first start port 633 is adjusted so as to coincide with the upward inclination of the nails 642a and 642b intended by the manufacturer. It is predetermined. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine of the second modified example, each nail 642a, 642b is parallel to the plane 633S when viewed from the right side, depending on the upper surface 633S of the first start port 633. The inclination of the nails 642a and 642b can be confirmed and corrected. Therefore, the first and second nails 642a and 642b can be easily repaired in inclination without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjustment tool.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the second modification, the nail inclination is restored by using the original flat surface 633S of the first start port 33 without providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-3. Modification 3:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 3 is different from the pachinko machine as the modified example 2 only in the inclination direction of the life nail, and the remaining configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of the third modification, the same configuration and the same structure as those of the pachinko machine of the second modification are given the same names and symbols, and the following description will be given.

  FIG. 15 is a view showing a pair of nails 742a and 742b and a first start port 733 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the third modification. FIG. 15A is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the upper side. FIG. 15B is a view corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment and is a view seen from the right side.

  In the second modification, as shown in FIG. 14B, the first nail 642a and the second nail 642b are arranged such that the central axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 is the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). It is the structure which inclines by predetermined angle (micro | micron | mu) 1 to the upper side (+ Y direction). On the other hand, in the third modification example, as shown in FIG. 15B, the first nail 742a and the second nail 742b are arranged such that the central axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 is the + Z direction. This is a configuration that is inclined from the (two-dot chain line) downward (−Y direction) by a predetermined angle ν1. The predetermined angle ν1 is a predetermined angle that is determined in advance, and in the present embodiment, is an angle when the type certification test is passed. The predetermined angle ν1 is, for example, any value from 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees.

  In the third modification, the entrance 733a formed in the first starting port 733 has a rectangular shape as in the second modification. However, the upper surface 733S of the first start port 733 is different from the second modification, and is a predetermined angle from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the lower side (−Y direction) with respect to the end 733b in contact with the plywood 30a. The configuration is inclined by ν1.

  For this reason, in the pachinko machine according to the third modification, when viewed from the right side, the central axis directions of the body portions 422 of the first nail 742a and the second nail 742b are the entrance holes of the first start port 733. It is parallel to the upper surface 733S of 733a.

  According to the pachinko machine of the third modification configured as described above, each nail 742a when viewed from the right side, depending on the upper surface 733S of the first start port 733, similarly to the pachinko machine of the second modification. , 742b can be confirmed and corrected so that the inclination of each nail 742a, 742b is parallel to the plane 733S. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclinations of the first and second nails 742a and 742b without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjustment tool.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the third modification, the nail inclination is restored by using the flat surface 733S of the first starting port 733 without providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-4. Modification 4:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 4 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the inclination direction of the life nail and the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration is the same. It is. In the pachinko machine according to the fourth modification, the same components as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same names and reference numerals, and the following description will be given.

  FIG. 16 is a view showing a pair of nails 842a and 842b and a first start port 833 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the fourth modification. FIG. 16A is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment and is a diagram seen from the upper side. FIG.16 (b) is a figure corresponding to FIG.11 (b) in 1st Embodiment, and is the figure seen from the right side.

  In the pachinko machines according to the first embodiment and the first to third modifications, the first nail and the second nail that are life nails are arranged such that the central axis direction of the body portion 422 with respect to the tip 423 is the + Z direction (two points The configuration is inclined from the chain line) to the right side (+ X direction), the left side (−X direction), the upper side (+ Y direction), and the lower side (−Y direction). On the other hand, in the modified example 4, the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b which are life nails are such that the central axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 is from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line). It was set as the structure inclined in the following directions. The inclination direction is an angle that intersects both the X axis and the Y axis at an angle other than a right angle. Specifically, the configuration is as follows.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11A, the first nail 42a located on the right side has a center axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 as the + Z direction when viewed from the upper side. When tilted by a first angle θ1 from the (two-dot chain line) to the right side (+ X direction) and viewed from the right side as shown in FIG. 11B, the central axis direction of the body 422 is along the Z-axis direction. It was configured as follows. On the other hand, in the modified example 4, the first nail 842a located on the right side is the same as the first nail 42a of the first embodiment when viewed from the upper side as shown in FIG. 16B, when viewed from the right side, the center axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 is predetermined from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+ Y direction). It was configured to tilt by an angle ξ1.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the second nail 42b located on the left side has a center axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 when viewed from the upper side as shown in FIG. When tilted by the second angle θ2 from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the left side (−X direction) and viewed from the right side as shown in FIG. 11B, the central axis direction of the body 422 is Z It was comprised along the axial direction. On the other hand, in the modified example 4, the second nail 842b located on the left side is the same as the first nail 42a of the first embodiment when viewed from the upper side as shown in FIG. 16B, when viewed from the right side, the center axis direction of the body 422 with respect to the tip 423 is predetermined from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) to the upper side (+ Y direction). It was configured to tilt by an angle ξ1.

  In the modification 4, the entrance 833a formed in the 1st starting port 833 is the trapezoid shape same as 1st Embodiment. However, the upper surface 833S of the first start port 833 is different from the first embodiment and the second modification, and the upper side (+ Y direction) from the + Z direction (two-dot chain line) with respect to the end portion 833b in contact with the plywood 30a. Is inclined by a predetermined angle ξ1. The predetermined angle ξ1 is a predetermined angle that is determined in advance, and in the present embodiment, is an angle when the type certification test is passed. The predetermined angle ξ1 is, for example, any value from 1 degree to 10 degrees, for example, 5 degrees.

  For this reason, in the pachinko machine according to the fourth modification, the first and second nails 842a and 842b and the entrance 833a of the first start port 833 have the third edge 893 as viewed from above. The first nail 842a is parallel to the central axis direction of the trunk portion 422, and the fourth edge 894 is parallel to the central axis direction of the trunk portion 422 of the second nail 842b. Further, when viewed from the right side, the central axis direction of each body portion 422 of the first nail 842a and the second nail 842b is parallel to the upper surface 833S of the entrance 833a of the first start port 833. It has become.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modification 4 configured as described above, the first nail 842a is viewed from the upper side by relying on the third edge 893 and the fourth edge 894 in the entrance 833a. The inclination of each nail 842a, 842b can be confirmed and corrected so that the second nail 842b is parallel to the fourth edge 894 so as to be parallel to the third edge 893. Also, relying on the upper surface 833S of the first start port 833, the inclination of each nail 842a, 842b is confirmed and corrected so that each nail 842a, 842b is parallel to the plane 833S when viewed from the right side. can do. Therefore, the first and second nails 842a and 842b can be easily repaired in inclination without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjustment tool.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth modification, the original first start port 833 is provided without providing a dedicated member for confirming the inclination of the nail, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Since the inclination of the nail can be repaired by using it, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the pachinko machine from becoming complicated.

A6-5. Modification 5:
In the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment and the first to fourth modifications, a reference portion serving as a reference for confirming whether or not the first nail and the second nail, which are life nails, are parallel to each other is restored. , A predetermined portion in the first starting port, for example, the third edge 333 and the fourth edge 334 of the entrance 33a shown in FIG. 11, or the upper surface 633S of the first starting port 633 shown in FIG. Met. On the other hand, in the modification 5, the said reference | standard part is comprised by the special mark provided in the 1st starting port. This will be described in detail below.

  The pachinko machine as the modified example 5 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the configuration of the first starting port, and the remainder including the first and second nails 42a and 42b. The configuration is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modification 5, the same name and code | symbol are attached | subjected about the same structure as the pachinko machine 10 of 1st Embodiment, and the following description is performed.

  FIG. 17 is a view showing a pair of nails 42 a and 42 b as life nails and a first start port 933 provided in the pachinko machine according to the fifth modification. FIG. 17A is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the upper side. In FIG. 17A, a part of the first and second nails 42a, 42b is broken and omitted for convenience of illustration. FIG. 17B is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, and is a diagram viewed from the right side.

  As illustrated in FIG. 17A, the entrance 933 a formed in the first start port 933 has a rectangular shape as in the second modification. The upper surface 933S of the first start port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. Long rectangular marks 951 and 952 are printed on the surface 933S. The marks 951 and 952 are colored by printing.

  On the surface 933S, the first mark 951 is printed on the right side with respect to the edge 993 on the right side of the entrance 933a. When viewed from the upper side, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 951 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 42a located on the right side. On the surface 933S, the second mark 952 is printed on the left side with respect to the left edge 994 of the entrance 933a. When viewed from the upper side, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the second nail 42b located on the left side. In addition, when viewed from above, the right outline of the first mark 951 is located slightly to the right of the right outline of the body portion 422 of the first nail 42a, and the left outline of the second mark 952 Is located slightly to the left of the left outline of the body 422 of the second nail 42b. That is, when viewed from above, at least a portion of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least a portion of the second mark 952 is not hidden by the second nail 42b.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 5 configured as described above, the first nail 42a is changed from the first mark 951 when viewed from the upper side, relying on the first mark 951 and the second mark 952. The inclination of each nail 42a, 42b can be confirmed and corrected so that the second nail 42b is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the second mark 952 so as to be parallel to the longitudinal direction. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjusting tool. Further, when viewed from above, at least a part of the first mark 951 is not hidden by the first nail 42a, and at least a part of the second mark 952 is not hidden by the second nail 42b. The visibility of the first and second marks 951 and 952 is high. For this reason, it is easy to identify the inclination of the first nail 42a and the second nail 42b.

A6-6. Modification 6:
Another example in which the above-described reference portion is configured by a dedicated mark provided at the first start port will be described as a sixth modification.

  The pachinko machine as the modified example 6 is different from the pachinko machine as the modified example 2 only in the configuration of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails 642a and 642b. Is the same. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 6, the same configuration as the pachinko machine of the modified example 2 is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

  FIG. 18 is a view showing a pair of nails 642a and 642b and a first start port 1033 as life nails provided in the pachinko machine of the sixth modification. FIG. 18A is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the upper side. FIG. 18B is a view corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment and is a view seen from the right side.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, the entrance 1033 a formed in the first starting port 1033 has a rectangular shape as in the second modification. The upper surface 1033S of the first start port 1033 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. A long rectangular mark 1051 is printed on the right side surface 1033T of the first start port 1033.

  When viewed from the right side, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is parallel to the central axis direction of the body portion 422 of the first nail 642a located on the right side. The mark 1051 is colored by printing.

  According to the pachinko machine of Modification 6 configured as described above, each nail 642a is arranged so that each nail 642a, 642b is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 when viewed from the right side, relying on the mark 1051. , 642b can be confirmed and corrected. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclinations of the first and second nails 642a and 642b without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjustment tool.

  In addition, the first mark 951, the second mark 952, and the mark 1051 in the modification 6 in the modified example 5 are replaced with those colored by printing, and the surface of the first start port 1033 is provided with a concavo-convex mark. What you did is fine. Specifically, it may be replaced with a rib, a dent, a step, or the like. Further, the shape of the mark is not limited to a long rectangular shape, and may be any shape as long as the direction can be defined. For example, an arrow symbol or two points indicating a base point and an end point may be used.

A6-7. Modification 7:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 7 is different from the pachinko machine as the modified example 5 only in the directions of the first mark and the second mark, and the first and second nails 42a, 42b. And the remaining configuration including the shape of the first start port 933 are the same. In the pachinko machine according to the modified example 7, the same configuration as the pachinko machine according to the modified example 5 is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

  FIG. 19 is a view showing a pair of nails 42 a and 42 b as life nails provided in the pachinko machine according to the modified example 7 and a first start port 933. FIG. 19A is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11A in the first embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the upper side. In FIG. 19A, parts of the first and second nails 42a and 42b are broken and omitted for convenience of illustration. FIG. 19B is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 11B in the first embodiment, and is a diagram seen from the right side.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the first start port 933 is the same as that of the fifth modification. The entrance port 933a of the first start port 933 has a rectangular shape, and the upper surface 933S of the first start port 933 is parallel to the Z-axis direction. Long rectangular marks 1151 and 1152 are printed on the surface 933S.

  On the surface 933S, the first mark 1151 is printed on the right side of the right edge 993 of the entrance 933a. When viewed from above, the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30. In other words, the first mark 1151 is printed on the plywood 30 a by ensuring that the first mark 1151 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30. In the present embodiment, by printing the first right-angle mark 1153 that indicates a right angle, the first mark 1151 is at a glance perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30. I try to find out that it is guaranteed.

  On the surface 933S, the second mark 1152 is printed on the left side with respect to the left edge 994 of the entrance 933a. When viewed from the upper side, the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30. In other words, the second mark 1152 is printed on the plywood 30 a by ensuring that the second mark 1152 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30 a constituting the game board 30 by the longitudinal direction thereof. In the present embodiment, by printing the second right-angle mark 1154 indicating right angle, the second mark 1152 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 at a glance. I try to find out that it is guaranteed. Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, by printing a third right-angle mark 1155 on the right side surface of the first start port 933, the upper surface 933S of the first start port 933 causes the game board 30 to be You may make it understand | indicate | reveal that it is perpendicular | vertical with respect to the surface of the plywood 30a to comprise. The first to third right-angle marks 1153 to 1155 are not necessarily required and may be omitted.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 7 configured as described above, the inclination of the first nail 42a can be confirmed using the first mark 1151, and the second mark 1152 can be used to check the second inclination. The inclination of the nail 42a can be confirmed. Specifically, by comparing the longitudinal direction of the first mark 1151 with the orientation of the first nail 42a, and comparing the longitudinal direction of the second mark 1152 with the orientation of the second nail 42b, the first and The inclination of the second nails 42a and 42b can be confirmed. Therefore, each nail 42a, 42b can be easily adjusted.

  As another modification, a configuration in which the orientation of the mark 1051 is changed in Modification 6 shown in FIG. Specifically, in another modification, the longitudinal direction of the mark 1051 is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 when viewed from the right side. That is, in Modification 6 shown in FIG. 18, the mark 1051 printed on the right side surface 1033T of the first start port 1033 is perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a constituting the game board 30 depending on the longitudinal direction thereof. Therefore, the configuration is printed on the plywood 30a. Also with this configuration, it is possible to confirm the vertical inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b.

  The first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in the modified example 7 are colored by printing. Alternatively, the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 may be formed by providing unevenness on the surface of the first start port. Specifically, it may be replaced with a rib, a dent, a step, or the like. Further, the shape of the mark is not limited to a long rectangular shape, and may be any shape as long as the direction can be defined.

  In the modified example 7, the first mark 1151 and the second mark described in the first start port 933 are used as reference parts for ensuring that the game board 30 is provided perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a. 1152. On the other hand, as a modification, instead of the mark, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a projection made of resin, for example, provided on the game board 30 is provided separately from the first start port 933. In short, any configuration may be used as long as it is guaranteed that the game board 30 is provided perpendicular to the surface of the plywood 30a.

  Furthermore, as another modification, the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 in Modification 7 may be added in the first embodiment and Modifications 1 and 4 thereof. According to this configuration, in addition to the third edge on the right side that forms the entrance and the fourth edge 334 on the left side, the first mark 1151 and the second mark 1152 also tilt the nail. Since the condition can be confirmed, the nail can be adjusted more accurately.

A6-8. Modification 8:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 8 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the first embodiment only in the shape of the first starting port, and the remaining configuration including the first and second nails is different. Are the same. In the pachinko machine according to the modified example 8, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is given the same name and reference numeral, and the following description will be given.

  FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the first start port 1233 provided in the pachinko machine according to the modified example 8 and its periphery. In the first embodiment and the first to seventh modifications, the first start port, for example, the first start port 33 shown in FIG. 10 has a hollow box shape and is formed on the upper (+ Y direction side) surface. The ball opening 33a includes a first edge 331 on the front side (+ Z direction side), a second edge 332 on the rear side (−Z direction side), a third edge 333 on the right side (+ X direction side), and a left side. And a fourth edge 334 (on the −X direction side). On the other hand, in the modification 8, as shown in FIG. 20, the 1st starting port 1233 has the shape from which the wall surface of the back side (-Z direction side) was removed in the hollow box shape. That is, the upper end surface of the first start port 1233 is substantially U-shaped.

  A ball entrance 1233a formed on the upper surface (+ Y direction side) of the first start port 1233 includes a first edge 1291 on the front side (+ Z direction side) and a second edge 1293 on the right side (+ X direction side). And a third edge 1294 on the left side (−X direction side) and a part of the surface of the plywood 30a. The game ball that has entered from the entrance 1233a passes through the first start opening 1233 and is sent to the opening 30c that penetrates the game board 30 in the front-rear direction.

  As with the third edge 333 in the first embodiment, the second edge 1293 on the right side (+ X direction side) is oriented from the + Z direction to the right side (+ X direction) with respect to the end on the −Z direction side. It is inclined by the first angle θ1. The third edge 1294 on the left side (−X direction side) is, as in the case of the fourth edge 334 in the first embodiment, the direction with the end on the −Z direction side as a reference from the + Z direction to the left side (−X direction). ) Is inclined by the second angle θ2. The first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2 are inclination angles at the time of shipment of the gaming machine with respect to the first and second nails 42a and 42b, as in the first embodiment.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 8 configured as described above, as with the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, relying on the second edge 1293 and the third edge 1294 at the entrance 1233a, Similarly to the first embodiment, the inclination of each nail 42a, 42b can be confirmed and corrected. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjusting tool.

  In addition, the shape of the 1st starting port mentioned above, ie, the shape of the 1st starting port from which an upper end surface becomes a substantially U-shape, the modification 1-7 demonstrated so far besides 1st Embodiment. In this case, the configuration may be adopted.

A6-9. Modification 9:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 9 is different from the pachinko machine 10 as the modified example 8 only in the shape of the first starting port. Regarding the remaining configuration including the first and second nails, Are the same. In the pachinko machine of the modification 9, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine of the modification 8 are denoted by the same names and symbols, and the following description will be given.

  FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing the first start port 1333 provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 9 and its surroundings. As with the first start port 1233 in the modification 8, the first start port 1333 has a substantially U-shaped configuration on the upper end surface. In addition, the first start port 1333 is different from the first start port 1233 in the modified example 8 in the following points (i) to (iii).

(I) In the first start port 1233 according to the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 20, the second edge 1293 on the right side (+ X direction side) and the left side (−X direction side) constituting the entrance 1233a. The third edge 1294 is configured to be inclined from the + Z direction by the first angle θ1 and the second angle θ2. On the other hand, in the first start port 1333 in the modified example 9, as shown in FIG. 21, the second edge 1393 on the right side (+ X direction side) and the third edge 1394 on the left side (−X direction side). Are parallel to the + Z direction.

(Ii) In the first starting port 1333 in the modified example 9, as shown in FIG. 21, the inclination angle at the time of shipment of the gaming machine about the first nail 42a on the outer surface 1333b of the right side wall of the first starting port 1333 The first numerical value information Na indicating the first angle θ1 is described, and is an inclination angle at the time of shipment of the gaming machine about the second nail 42b on the inner surface 1333c of the left side wall of the first start port 1333. Second numerical information Nb indicating the second angle θ2 is described. On the other hand, the first start port 1233 in the modification 8 does not have such a configuration. The first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are numerical values indicating angles, for example, “5 degrees”.

  (Iii) The first start port 1233 in the modified example 8 has an integral configuration. On the other hand, the 1st starting port 1333 in the modification 9 is comprised by the 1st parts Pa and the 2nd parts Pb. The second part Pb is mainly a left side wall portion of the first start port 1333. The first part Pa is a part other than the second part Pb. First, as shown in FIG. 22, the first part Pa and the second part Pb are separate, and the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined at the manufacturing stage, and the first start port 1333 is joined. Is configured. The first numerical information Na is printed on the first part Pa, and the numerical information Nb is printed on the second part Pb. The first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are printed before the first part Pa and the second part Pb are joined.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modification 9 configured as described above, the first nail located on the right side depends on the first numerical information Na printed on the outer surface 1333b of the right side wall of the first start port 1333. The inclination of 42a can be confirmed and corrected. Further, the inclination of the second nail 42b positioned on the left side can be confirmed and corrected based on the second numerical information Nb printed on the inner surface 1333c of the left side wall of the first start port 1333. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 42a and 42b without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjusting tool.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine of the modified example 9, since the first start port 1333 is constituted by the first part Pa and the second part Pb, the first numerical information Na is included in the first part Pa at the time of manufacture. And the second numerical information Nb can be easily printed on the second part Pb. In particular, when the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are provided in the same direction so that both the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb can be seen from the right side (+ X direction side). Since the second numerical information Nb located on the left side (−X direction side) is inside the first start port 1233, it is difficult to print the second numerical information Nb during manufacturing. According to the pachinko machine, since the first start port 1333 is constituted by the first part Pa and the second part Pb, the second numerical information Nb can be easily printed, and the first start The mouth 1333 is easy to manufacture.

  Although the first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb are described, the information indicating the angle may be displayed instead of the information in the display mode of the plurality of segment light emitting units. In short, any configuration can be used as long as it shows information about the angle.

  The first starting port 1333 provided in the pachinko machine according to the modified example 9 is of a type in which the upper end surface is substantially U-shaped, but instead of this, the rear (−Z direction side) wall surface A hollow box-shaped type having Moreover, although the 1st start port 1333 is comprised by 1st parts Pa and 2nd parts Pb, it may replace with this and may be comprised by three or more parts. The first numerical information Na and the second numerical information Nb indicating the inclination angle of the nail may be configured as described in the first embodiment and the first, fourth, fifth, seventh, and eighth modified examples.

A6-10. Modification 10:
FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing the electric accessory 1410 provided in the pachinko machine as the tenth modification and the periphery thereof. The electric accessory 1410 is provided, for example, below the center of the game board of the pachinko machine. As described above, the game board has a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an electric accessory 1410 is provided in one of the openings 1400.

  The electric accessory 1410 is a normal electric accessory and is configured as a so-called electric tulip. The electric accessory 1410 includes a pair of right and left movable pieces 1411a and 1411b, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state). The closed state is the state shown in FIG. In the closed state, since the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is small, it is difficult for the game ball to enter. On the other hand, in the open state (see FIG. 24 of the modified example 11), the distance between the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is large, and the game ball is easy to enter. A game ball that has entered the electric accessory 1410 is sent to the opening 1400. Based on the game ball entering the electric accessory 1410, for example, a winning lottery is performed. Hereinafter, the movable piece on the + X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is referred to as “first movable piece 1411a”, and the movable piece on the −X direction side of the pair of movable pieces 1411a and 1411b is referred to as the “first movable piece 1411a”. Two movable pieces 1411b ". As in the first embodiment, the + X direction indicates the right side when viewed from the front, and the −X direction indicates the left side when viewed from the front.

  Above the electric accessory 1410, a pair of right and left nails 1442a and 1442b are provided. Depending on the distance between the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b, the probability of the game ball entering the electric accessory 1410 varies. Hereinafter, the nail on the + X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b is referred to as a “first nail 1442a”, and the nail on the −X direction side of the pair of nails 1442a and 1442b is referred to as a “second nail 1442b”. Call it. The shapes of the first and second nails 1442a and 1442b are the same as the nails of the first embodiment.

  The first nail 1442a is inclined by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 5 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, the + X direction) from the + Z direction with respect to the central axis direction of the body portion with respect to the tip. Is provided. The second nail 1442b is inclined by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 7 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, -X direction) from the + Z direction with respect to the central axis direction of the body portion with respect to the tip. Is provided. The tilt direction and tilt angle for the first nail 1442a and the tilt direction and tilt angle for the second nail 1442b are individual and are at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

  In the electric accessory 1410, the tip portion of the first movable piece 1411a is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as “first flat surface”) Sa. The tip of the second movable piece 1411b is cut off to form a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as “second flat surface”) Sb. In Modification 10, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the inclination angle and inclination direction of the first flat surface Sa coincide with the inclination direction and inclination angle of the first nail 1442a, and the second flat surface It is designed in advance so that the inclination angle and the inclination direction of Sb coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1442b. In other words, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the first flat surface Sa defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1442a by the inclination direction and the inclination angle, and the second flat surface Sa The surface Sb defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1442b by the inclination direction and the inclination angle.

  According to the pachinko machine of Modification 10 configured as described above, when the electric accessory 1410 is in the closed state, the first flat surface Sa of the first movable piece 1411a in the electric accessory 1410 is relied on. The inclination of the first nail 1442a can be confirmed and corrected to the state at the time of shipment. Further, when the electric accessory 1410 is in a closed state, the inclination of the second nail 1442b is confirmed by relying on the second flat surface Sb of the second movable piece 1411b in the electric accessory 1410, and the state at the time of shipment. Can be corrected. Therefore, the first and second nails 1442a and 1442b located above the electric accessory 1410 can be easily repaired without the need for a lot of experience in adjusting the nails and the need for dedicated adjustment tools. be able to.

A6-11. Modification 11:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 11 is different from the pachinko machine as the modified example 10 in the electric accessory in that the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the flat portion are different, and further, the first nail and the second nail The position is different. About the structure of those other than these, the pachinko machine as the modification 11 and the pachinko machine as the modification 10 are the same.

  FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing the electric accessory 1510 provided in the pachinko machine as the modified example 11 and its periphery. The electric accessory 1510 is provided, for example, below the center of the game board of the pachinko machine. The electric accessory 1510 is provided in the opening 1400 in the same manner as the electric accessory 1410 in the modified example 10. Since the opening 1400 is the same as that of the modified example 10, the same reference numerals are given. The electric accessory 1510 is provided with a pair of right and left movable pieces 1511a and 1511b, and is configured to be switchable between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state), similarly to the electric accessory 1410 in the modified example 10. Has been. The open state is the state shown in FIG.

  A first nail 1542a is provided in the upper right direction of the electric accessory 1510, and a second nail 1542b is provided in the upper left direction of the electric accessory 1510. The first nail 1542a is inclined by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 5 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, + X direction) from the + Z direction with respect to the central axis direction of the body portion with respect to the tip. Is provided. The second nail 1542b is inclined by a predetermined inclination angle (for example, 7 degrees) in a predetermined inclination direction (for example, -X direction) from the + Z direction with respect to the central axis direction of the body portion with respect to the tip. Is provided. The tilt direction and tilt angle for the first nail 1542a and the tilt direction and tilt angle for the second nail 1542b are individual and are at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

  In the electric accessory 1510, the tip portion of the first movable piece 1511a is cut off to form the first flat surface Ha, and the tip portion of the second movable piece 1511b is cut off to become the second flat surface Hb. . In the present modification 11, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the inclination angle and inclination direction of the first flat surface Ha coincide with the inclination direction and inclination angle of the first nail 1542a, and the second flat surface The inclination angle and the inclination direction of Hb are designed in advance so as to coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1542b. In other words, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the first flat surface Ha defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1542a by the inclination direction and the inclination angle, and the second flat surface Ha The surface Hb defines the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1542b by the inclination direction and the inclination angle.

  According to the pachinko machine of Modification 11 configured as described above, when the electric accessory 1510 is in an open state, the first flat surface Ha of the first movable piece 1511a in the electric accessory 1510 is relied on, The inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the electric accessory 1510 can be confirmed and corrected. In addition, when the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the electric accessory 1510 depends on the second flat surface Hb of the second movable piece 1511b in the electric accessory 1510. It is possible to check and correct the inclination. For this reason, the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b can be easily repaired in inclination without requiring a lot of experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjustment tool. In particular, the electric accessory 1510 is a target for repairing the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b on the upper right and upper left of the electric accessory 1510 close to the tip positions of the movable pieces 1511a and 1511b when in the open state. The nail can be easily repaired.

  In Modification 10, the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb may be colored with a color different from the surroundings. In Modification 11, the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb may be colored with a color different from the surroundings. According to these configurations, the repairer easily recognizes that the first and second flat surfaces Sa and Sb and the first and second flat surfaces Ha and Hb serve as a reference for repairing the inclination of the nail. Can do.

A6-12. Modification 12:
The pachinko machine as the modified example 12 is different from the pachinko machine as the modified example 11 in the shape of the first movable piece provided in the electric accessory and is the same in the remaining points. In the pachinko machine of the modified example 12, the same configuration and the same configuration as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example 11 are denoted by the same names and symbols, and the following description will be given.

  FIG. 25 is a front view showing the first movable piece 1611a of the electric accessory provided in the pachinko machine of Modification 12. As in the case of the modification 11, the electric accessory in the modification 12 is configured as a so-called electric tulip, and can be switched between a closed state (closed state) and an open state (open state) as indicated by arrows in the figure. It is configured. The first movable piece 1611a provided in the electric accessory corresponds to the first movable piece 1511a in the modified example 11, and is a movable piece located on the X direction side (right side in front view).

  The first movable piece 1611a includes a movable piece main body portion 1620 and a protruding piece 1630 that protrudes from the distal end portion of the movable piece main body portion 1620. The end of the protruding piece 1630 opposite to the movable piece main body 1620 is a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as “first flat surface”) Ta.

  A pair of nails are provided in the vicinity of the electric member in the modified example 12 as in the electric member in the modified example 11. One of the pair of nails is a first nail 1542a in the drawing. The first nail 1542a is provided at the upper right of the electric accessory. When the electric accessory is in the open state, the first flat surface Ta of the protruding piece 1630 provided in the first movable piece 1611a comes closest to the first nail 1542a. When the electric accessory 1510 is in the open state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the first flat surface Ta coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the first nail 1542a.

  Note that the second movable piece of the electric accessory in Modification 12 has a line-symmetric shape about the Y-axis direction with respect to the first movable piece 1611a, although not shown. When the electric accessory is in the open state, the second flat surface of the protruding piece provided in the second movable piece comes closest to the second nail 1542b (see FIG. 24 of Modification 11). When the electric accessory is in the open state, the inclination angle and the inclination direction of the second flat surface coincide with the inclination direction and the inclination angle of the second nail 1542b.

  According to the pachinko machine of the modified example 12 configured as described above, as in the modified example 11, when the electric accessory is in the open state, the first flat surface of the first movable piece 1611a in the electric accessory. By relying on Ta, the inclination of the first nail 1542a located on the upper right side of the electric accessory can be confirmed and corrected. Similarly, the inclination of the second nail 1542b located on the upper left side of the electric accessory can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the second flat surface of the first movable piece. Therefore, it is possible to easily repair the deviation of the inclination of the first and second nails 1542a and 1542b on the upper right and upper left of the electric accessory without requiring much experience in adjusting the nail and a dedicated adjustment tool. can do.

  In the modified example 12, the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface may be colored with a color different from the surroundings. According to this configuration, the repairer can easily recognize that the first flat surface Ta and the second flat surface serve as a reference for repairing the inclination of the nail.

A6-13. Modification 13:
In the first embodiment and the modifications 1, 4, and 8 thereof, the defining means for defining the angle formed between the nail and the surface of the game board is the edge portion at the entrance of the first starting opening. On the other hand, as a modification, the defining means may be a part of the outer periphery of the first starting port, and may be any part as long as it is a part of the first starting port. Moreover, it is not necessary to restrict to the site | part which a 1st start port has, It is good also as a part in connection with a 2nd start port and another entrance hole member. Furthermore, it can also be set as the site | part which members other than a ball entrance member have.

A6-14. Modification 14:
In the first embodiment and the first to twelfth modifications thereof, a nail has been adopted as one that changes the circulation of the game ball. However, the nail is not limited to a nail, and a rod-like shape that can change the circulation of the game ball is used. If it is a member, it can also be set as any structures, such as resin-made protrusions.

A6-15. Modification 15:
In the above modifications 10 to 12, the electric tulip that is an ordinary electric accessory is adopted as the movable means that can be switched between the closed state and the open state, but instead of this, a mini attacker that is an ordinary electric accessory. May be adopted. Specifically, a predetermined portion of the mini attacker defines an angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board. Further, as the movable means, a special electric accessory such as an attacker (a big prize opening) may be adopted instead of the ordinary electric accessory. Specifically, a predetermined part of the attacker is configured to define an angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board. Furthermore, the movable means may be configured to employ a non-electrically-powered object such as a mechanical type instead of the electrically-powered object.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Game machine structure:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is used and demonstrated to the component provided with the same function as the said embodiment.

  FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17.

  An opened window portion 18 is formed at a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the production effect by lighting or blinking at the time of winning lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of winning the winning, or at the time of reaching. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent out from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for a player to perform an input operation for a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the game ball launching by the game ball launching mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and the operation handle 25 Is provided with a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the first and second rotations based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  A game ball launch button 26 for operation by the player is provided on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched to the front of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same launch intensity as when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when a game ball is launched by operating the game ball launch button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board as viewed from the front, and flows down to the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can make a so-called “right strike”. Further, in the following description, when the operation handle 25 is operated, a game ball is fired, and when the game ball flows to the left in front of the game board and flows down the left side of the game board, It may be expressed as “strike”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired on the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to release the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. It may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball launch button 26 is disposed inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, similarly to the weight button 25b. In this way, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 only with the right hand.

  FIG. 27 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is composed of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided to the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30 and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. The nails 42 and the windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 includes a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33a, a first starting port 33b, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, an ordinary electric accessory 53, a variable winning device 54, and a swing. A minute mechanism 120 is provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special map unit 37, a universal map unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general prize opening 32 is a ball opening through which a game ball can enter and is provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The distribution mechanism 120 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 30. The distribution mechanism 120 distributes the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 to two flow paths alternately. Of the two channels distributed by the distribution mechanism 120, one channel guides the game ball to the first start port 33a, and the other channel guides the game ball to the first start port 33b. Details of the structure of the distribution mechanism 120 will be described later.

  The first start port 33a and the first start port 33b are entrances into which game balls can enter. As shown in FIG. 27, the first start port 33a is arranged by the distribution mechanism 120 at a position where the game balls distributed to the left side when viewed from the front of the game board 30 can enter. Further, the first start port 33b is arranged at a position where the game balls distributed to the right side when the game board 30 is viewed from the front by the distribution mechanism 120 can enter. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33a or the first start port 33b, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery described later is executed. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the first start port 33a or the first start port 33b is not limited to one, and a configuration in which two or more prize balls are used may be employed.

  The 2nd starting opening 34 is a entrance where a game ball can enter. As shown in FIG. 27, the second start port 34 is disposed between the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a winning lottery described later is executed. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the second start port 34 is not limited to three, and a configuration of two or less or four or more may be adopted.

  The variable winning device 54 includes a large winning opening 54a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an open / close door 54b that opens and closes the large winning opening 54a. The open / close door 54b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the big prize opening 54a. When a game ball enters the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b, or the second start port 34, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, if the win is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 54b of the variable winning device 54. Specifically, when the open / close door 54b of the variable winning device 54 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 54b transitions from a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter to an open state in which a game ball can enter and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, the transition is again made to the closed state. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 54a of the variable winning device 54, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

  The through gate 35a and the through gate 35b are through gates that serve as a trigger for executing a lottery for operating the ordinary electric accessory 53. As shown in FIG. 27, the through gate 35 a is disposed in the distribution mechanism 120. Details of the through gate 35a will be described later. The through gate 35b is arranged outside the distribution mechanism 120 and on the right side of the distribution mechanism 120 when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. When the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electrical instrument opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electrification opening is won, the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to an electrification opening state that operates in a predetermined manner. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35a and the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b are not held.

  The ordinary electric combination 53 is an electric combination arranged below the distribution mechanism 120 and above the first start port 33b. As described above, the ordinary electric accessory 53 operates in a predetermined manner when the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b is won. Details of the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described later.

  Here, the distribution mechanism 120 and the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution mechanism 120. As shown to Fig.28 (a), the distribution mechanism 120 is provided with the housing 121 for resin distribution mechanisms. In FIG. 28, in order to show the inside of the distribution mechanism casing 121, the outer shape of the distribution mechanism casing 121 is indicated by a broken line. The distribution mechanism housing 121 is formed with an opening 122 through which a game ball can flow, and an opening 123 and an opening 124 through which the game ball can flow out. The distribution mechanism housing 121 is formed with a left channel R1 and a right channel R2. Furthermore, a sorting rotating portion 125 and a through gate 35a are arranged inside the sorting mechanism casing 121. The through gate 35a is disposed in the right channel R2.

  The distribution turning unit 125 includes a turning shaft 126 and can turn around the turning shaft 126. When the distribution rotation unit 125 rotates clockwise and when it rotates counterclockwise, the bottom of the distribution rotation unit 125 comes into contact with the distribution mechanism housing 121. Therefore, the rotation range of the distribution rotation unit 125 is limited. In addition, the sorting rotation unit 125 includes a left side holding unit 127 and a right side holding unit 128 that temporarily hold a game ball flowing in from the opening 122.

  An example of the operation of the distribution mechanism 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (d). As shown in FIG. 28 (a), in the case where the sorting rotation portion 125 is tilted to the left side, when the game ball flows in from the opening 122, the right holding portion 128 temporarily holds the game ball. . After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the game is held by the right holding unit 128 by the distribution rotating unit 125 rotating clockwise by the weight of the game ball held by the right holding unit 128. The sphere is discharged toward the right channel R2. The game ball released from the right holding part 128 passes through the through gate 35a, flows through the right channel R2, and then flows out from the opening 124. The game ball that has flowed out of the opening 124 enters the first start port 33b, or enters the second start port 34 when the ordinary electric accessory 53 is operating. In addition, the rotating part 125 for distribution after rotating clockwise maintains the state inclined to the right side.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), when the game ball next flows in from the opening 122, the distribution turning portion 125 maintains a state of being inclined to the right side. The game ball is held. After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (d), the game turning game 125 held in the left holding unit 127 is rotated counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball held in the left holding unit 127 and rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The sphere is discharged toward the left channel R1. The game ball released from the left holding part 127 flows out from the opening 123 after flowing through the left channel R1. The game ball that has flowed out of the opening 123 enters the first start port 33a. In addition, the rotating part 125 for distribution after rotating counterclockwise maintains the state inclined to the left side. As described above, the distribution mechanism 120 has a function of alternately distributing the game balls flowing into the opening 122 into the left channel R1 and the right channel R2.

  Next, the ordinary electric accessory 53 will be described.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ordinary electric accessory 53. FIG. 29A shows the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the closed state. As described above, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is disposed below the distribution mechanism 120 and above the first start port 33b. When a winning combination is made in the electric component release lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the ordinary electric combination 53 is provided. The movable piece 53a protrudes toward the front side of the game board 30 (hereinafter also referred to as opening).

  As illustrated, the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes a movable piece 53a and a convex portion 53b disposed on the movable piece 53a. Although not shown in FIG. 29B, the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes a general electric accessory driving unit 53c that drives the movable piece 53a.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (b), the protruding movable piece 53 a assists the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, there are roughly two patterns in which the protruding movable piece 53a assists the game ball to enter the second starting port 34. The first pattern is a pattern that assists the game balls flowing into the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 and the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 entering the second start port 34. Specifically, when the movable piece 53a protrudes when the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 flow out of the opening 124, the movable piece 53a causes the game balls to be moved to the second start port. 34 to assist in entering the second start port 34. The second pattern is a pattern for assisting the game ball flowing through the through gate 35b and flowing into the second start opening 34. Specifically, when the movable piece 53a protrudes when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b flows down and reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53, the movable piece 53a moves the game ball to the first position. 2 It guides to the starting port 34 and assists to enter the second starting port 34. In the case of the second pattern, if the movable piece 53a protrudes when a game ball that has not passed through the through gate 35b reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53, the movable piece 53a is not included in the game. Assisting the ball to enter the second starting port 34.

  In any of the patterns described above, it is assumed that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is kept open until the game ball circulates on the movable piece 53a and reaches the second start port 34. If the normal electric accessory 53 is closed before the game ball circulates on the movable piece 53a and reaches the second start port 34, the above pattern is not met. The game balls that have circulated on the movable piece 53a do not enter the second starting port 34 but flow further downstream.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 29B, as shown in FIG. 29C, the ordinary electric accessory 53 that has been in the open state is closed. That is, the protruding movable piece 53 a is stored in the game board 30. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each type of support mode in which the ordinary electric accessory 53 assists the game ball entering the second start port 34. Different. Each of the support modes provided in the pachinko machine 10 is the time from the start of the electric character opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b until the lottery result is output (electric (Variation time of an accessory release lottery), a winning probability of an electric actor release lottery, and an opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 are different. Details of the support mode provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described later. The distribution mechanism 120 and the ordinary electric accessory 53 have been described above.

  Returning to FIG. An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. The 1st symbol display part 37a and the 2nd symbol display part 37b are respectively comprised by the segment indicator by which the some segment light emission part was arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect.

  The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b. When the winning lottery is triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port 33a or the first starting port 33b, the first symbol display unit 37a performs a display corresponding to the lottery result on the segment display. As a display mode until the first display, the first symbol variation display or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  The 2nd symbol display part 37b is a display part for displaying a 2nd symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on a winning lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second start port 34. When a winning lottery is performed in response to the game ball entering the second starting port 34, the second symbol display unit 37b displays the segment display unit until a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. Then, the variation display or predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment display to stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  Here, the time from the start of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b until the stop display is displayed. It is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the first symbol variation display displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is referred to as the first variation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the display of the variation of the second symbol to be displayed until the stop display is referred to as the second variation time.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display part 37c and a second hold display part 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display part 37a and the second symbol display part 37b.

  The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of hold of the first start port (the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b) according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four game balls that have entered the first start port 33a or the first start port 33b are put on hold as a total of the two first start ports.

  The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of hold of the second start port 34 according to the color or combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second start opening 34 are held.

  The universal map unit 38 includes a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electrified object opening lottery is triggered by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the general map unit 38 is turned on, blinked, or in a predetermined mode as a display mode of the light emitting display. To display. When the electrification opening lottery is completed, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 54 is satisfied. A game in which the door 54b is kept open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  The special map unit 37, the universal map unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light-emitting display using an LED lamp. You may be comprised by the various display apparatus which can show a lottery result and a lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  When the 1st symbol display part 37a carries out a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entrance of the game ball to the 1st starting port 33a or the 1st starting port 33b, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 41 is configured so that when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variation display or predetermined display based on the game ball entering the second start port 34, the symbol variation display or predetermined Is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to the symbol change display or the predetermined display triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b or the second start port 34, but a big hit An effect display during the opening / closing execution mode that shifts to the case of winning is also performed. Details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described below.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and a display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. FIG. 30A is an explanatory diagram showing a first liquid crystal symbol or a second liquid crystal symbol that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a. The second liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (a), on the liquid crystal display device 41, symbols indicating numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design by which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows the numbers 1-8 as a symbol which is variably displayed.

  FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 30A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom or from below. A variable display that scrolls up is displayed. As shown in FIG. 30B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) or the second start port 34, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined periodicity. The variable display that scrolls in the direction is started. The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display ends and the display is stopped, if the winning lottery result by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the mode of the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described mode, but the number of symbol columns, the number of effective lines, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the symbols of each symbol column Various modes can be adopted as the mode of the variable display of symbols such as the number.

  Here, the game times is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 It is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one winning lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol is obtained for each game. In any one of the display units 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs a predetermined process every game. After the symbol string is variably displayed, the symbol string is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the time required for one game time is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is a time from when the variable display is started until a predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is a time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. Yes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30B, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on winning in the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on winning in the second start port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls won in the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is up to four each.

  FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown in the figure, the main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a.

  In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers as the liquid crystal symbols shown in FIG. 30 (a), and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom. A variable display that scrolls from top to bottom or from bottom to top is performed. As shown in FIG. 30B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L1.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the special figure starting port 51, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display ends and the display is stopped, if the winning lottery result by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L1. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L1. In addition, the aspect of the design for liquid crystal in the main display area MA is not limited to the above-described aspect. For example, various display modes can be used for the liquid crystal symbols such as the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of active lines, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. is there.

  Here, the game times means from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display until the stop display ends. The lottery result of the winning lottery for the special information acquired based on the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b) or the second starting port 34 is given to the player. This is one unit of the notification process. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one lottery for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on a game ball entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) or the second start port 34, 1 After each segment, the segment indicator is variably displayed on either the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b, and then the display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information is made. Stop the segment display. Moreover, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entrance of the game ball into the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) or the second start port 34. Each time a game is played, the symbol display device 41 displays a symbol string as a first liquid crystal symbol or a second liquid crystal symbol, and then displays a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Stop the symbol sequence. In addition, the time required for one game time is also referred to as a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is a time from when the variable display is started until a predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is a time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (b), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of reserved game times based on the ball entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of reserved game times based on the ball entering the second start port 34 is displayed. The reserved game times are game times that have not yet been executed, and are special games that are acquired based on entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) or the second start port 34. Regarding information, it refers to game times in which a variable display for notifying the lottery result of the winning lottery is not started. The number of reserving game times that can be held based on the ball entering the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first hold display area Ds1 can display hold displays corresponding to the four hold game times (hereinafter also referred to as first hold game times display). Further, the number of reserved game times that can be held based on the ball entering the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second hold display area Ds2 can display hold displays corresponding to the four hold game times (hereinafter also referred to as second hold game times display).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the display surface 41a is flashed and lit in synchronization with the change display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display part 37a of the special symbol unit 37. The first synchronous display section Sync1 that performs display, and the second synchronous display that performs blinking display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37 Part Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is performing a variable display, the first synchronous display unit Sync1 is blinking and when the first symbol display unit 37a is displaying a stop, The 1-synchronization display section Sync1 is turned on. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b is performing a variable display, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 is blinking, and when the second symbol display unit 37b is performing a stop display, the second synchronization display is performed. The part Sync2 is turned on.

  In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a displays the main display area MA, the first hold display area Ds1, the second hold display area Ds2, the first synchronization display section Sync1, and the second synchronization display section Sync2. Although the configuration is adopted, a configuration in which the display surface 41a does not display part or all of these displays may be adopted.

B2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured with the main control device 60 as a center, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the program recorded in the ROM 63 is executed. In addition, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the functions of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 is supplied with power of DC stable 24V from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, on the input side of the main control board 61, a general winning port 32, a first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b), a second start port 34, a through gate 35a, a through gate 35b, Various detection sensors provided at various entrances and through gates such as the variable winning device 54 are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not Further, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery based on the game balls entering the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) and second start port 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a universal electric component drive unit 53 c that opens and closes the ordinary electric combination 53, a variable winning drive unit 54 c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 54 b of the variable winning device 54, and a main display unit 45 is connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuit.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 54c so that the opening / closing door 54b is opened / closed. Further, when the electrification opening is selected as a result of the electrification opening release lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the ordinary electrification driving unit 53c so that the ordinary electrification accessory 53 is opened. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b on the main display unit 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display on the main display unit 45 is performed. The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the result of entering the ball. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a game ball is entered into the general prize opening 32, a prize ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the first start port 33 ( When the entry of a game ball into the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b) is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the second start When it is determined that a game ball has entered the mouth 34, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize ball.

  A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 performs launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. An operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player holds the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the rotation operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, a game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14 and driving control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. In addition, an effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. Various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control apparatus 100, etc. are controlled.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. The presence / absence of reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are variably displayed are grasped. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time which is the time required for one game time is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 45, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a big hit random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When distributing the jackpot type, a jackpot type counter C2 is used. A reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not to generate reach when the symbol sequence to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is deviated and changed.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in the open state.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b is provided with a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b), the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the incoming ball Each value of the variation type counter CS is stored in time series in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. When a game ball enters the second start port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of entering are stored in the holding information storage area 64b. 2 is stored in time series in the reserved area Rb.

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 (the first starting port 33a, the first starting port 33b), the timing of the entering is determined. Is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b, and when a game ball enters the second start port 34, the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b is entered at the timing of the entry. Remembered.

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the determination table stored in the determination table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb is the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). ) Or moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c in the order obtained by the game balls entering the second start port 34. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is checked against a hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not the jackpot random counter C1 is a jackpot.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment one by one within the range of 0 to 39 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is the timing of the entry when a game ball enters the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b). It is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entry. The

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the win lottery result is a big win, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the table. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. . In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the winning lottery result is not a big win. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b). 1 is stored in the holding area Ra, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not the error occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 after moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, and the reach is determined. It is determined whether or not the error occurs. However, when the winning lottery result is a big hit and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach is the stop of a combination of symbols that may be a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for a portion of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in the state of the remaining symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 30 (b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a symbol is displayed in the symbol row Z2, and a reach is achieved. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state that the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when the reach effect is being performed, or prior to the reach display, it is determined whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. May be.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, the variation type counter CS returns to zero.

  The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41. In determining the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, a variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 465, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e when the game ball enters the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b. Thereafter, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the ordinary electric accessory 53 to the open state using the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 in the execution area 64e for the electric accessory. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is maintained in a closed state.

  Note that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the special information in the present invention. It corresponds to. Further, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

  Next, the success / failure table will be described. The success / failure table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when the lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the winning lottery. In the winning lottery in the low probability mode, the success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to. In the winning lottery in the probability mode, the success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Moreover, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is the 1st reservation area of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b). A check table for checking against the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in Ra and a check table for checking against the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second start port 34. The success / failure table is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first start / failure table (low probability mode), a first start / fail table (high probability mode), and a second start / fail table (low probability mode). The four success / failure tables for the probability mode and the second start opening / failure table (for the high probability mode) are stored in the success / failure table storage area 63 a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the first start opening determination table. FIG. 33A shows a first start port success / failure table (low probability mode), and FIG. 33B shows a first start port success table (high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), four values from 0 to 3 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a jackpot, in the first start / fail table (for the low probability mode). Yes. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the four values 0 to 3 (4 to 1199) are not included. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the first start / fail table (for the high probability mode). Has been. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values 0 to 19 are out of place. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the success / failure table for the second start port. FIG. 34 (a) shows a second start port success / failure table (low probability mode), and FIG. 34 (b) shows a second start port success / failure table (high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the second start opening success / failure table (for the low probability mode). Yes. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the four values 0 to 3 (4 to 1199) are not included. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is a jackpot, in the second start / fail table (for the high probability mode). Has been. Of the values 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values 0 to 19 are out of place. As described above, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the low probability mode hit / fail table is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the high probability mode hit / fail table. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, if the probability that the high probability mode is a big hit is higher than the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers set as the big win are arbitrary.

  Although not adopted in the success / failure table in the present embodiment, “small winning” may be provided as a result of the winning lottery.

  “Small Win” is a success / failure result that does not trigger a transition in both the lottery mode and the support mode, although it triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 54 is opened / closed. On the other hand, “displacement” is a result of success / failure that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and does not trigger the transition for the lottery mode and support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing a difference in the following four modes or modes.
(1) Number of times (number of rounds) of opening / closing door of variable winning device in open / close execution mode
(2) Aspect of open / close control of variable winning device in open / close execution mode (3) Winning lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) after completion of open / close execution mode
(4) A mode of support mode after opening / closing execution mode ends

  As a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device in the above (2) opening / closing execution mode, a plurality of types of opening / closing patterns (hereinafter also simply referred to as “opening / closing patterns”) of the opening / closing doors 54b of the variable winning device 54 are provided. One type of opening / closing pattern may be set correspondingly. In the present embodiment, one kind of opening / closing pattern is set corresponding to each jackpot type, and the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing door 54b is different for each opening / closing pattern. The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 54b in this embodiment will be described later.

  In addition, as a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device in the opening / closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of the game ball entering (winning) in the variable winning device 54 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relative. The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so as to be higher or lower. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the open / close door 54b in the open / close execution mode is set to continue until 5 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the open / close door 54b reaches seven. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, it is set so that one opening of the opening / closing door 54b in the opening / closing execution mode is continued until 1.6 seconds elapses or the number of balls entered into the opening / closing door 54b is seven. Can do.

  The opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 54b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of entering the variable winning device from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the open / close door 54b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may be set longer than the low-frequency winning mode, or the opening limit number for one opening may be set longer. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that the winning to the variable winning device 54 does not substantially occur. In the present embodiment, the low-frequency winning mode is not provided, and the high-frequency winning mode is set for all jackpots.

  In the present embodiment, if the winning lottery results in a big win, the big hit type is distributed using the big win type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a sorting table in the sorting table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 35A shows a distribution table for the first start port, and FIG. 35B shows a distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referred to in the winning lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b). The distribution table for use is referred to in the winning lottery based on the game balls entering the second start port 34.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 35A, the distribution table for the first start port includes the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b). As the jackpot types based on the game balls entering the game, 16R probability variable jackpot B, 8R probability variable jackpot A, and 8R normal jackpot A are set. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 4” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot B, “5 to 19” corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot A, “ 20-39 "is set to correspond to 8R normal jackpot A.

  In the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 16 (16 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. In addition, in the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the high frequency support mode B continues until the next jackpot is won. . The details of the support mode executed in the pachinko machine 10 will be described later.

  In the 8R probability variation jackpot A, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 (8 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. In addition, in the 8R probability variation jackpot A, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A, and the high frequency support mode A continues until the next big win is won. .

  In the 8R normal jackpot A, the opening number of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 (8 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. In addition, in the 8R normal jackpot A, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is ended becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode A, and the game frequency ends 100 times after the high frequency support mode A is started. Until then, the high-frequency support mode A is executed, and when the game times are completed 100 times, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode A to the low-frequency support mode.

  As shown in the distribution table for the second start opening in FIG. 35 (b), the distribution table for the second start opening includes, as a jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34, 16R probability variation jackpot B, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 8R normal jackpot B are set. In the present embodiment, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot B, “10 to 19” corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot B, “ 20-39 "is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot B.

  Since the 16R probability variation big hit B has been described in the distribution table for the first start port in FIG. 35, the description thereof is omitted here.

  In the 8R probability variation big hit B, the number of times the variable winning device 54 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. In the 8R probability variation jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the high frequency support mode B continues until the next big win is won. .

  In the 8R normal jackpot B, the opening number of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 (8 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 54 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. In addition, in the 8R normal jackpot B, the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the low probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the game times are ended 100 times after the high frequency support mode B is started. Until then, the high-frequency support mode B is executed, and when the game times are completed 100 times, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode B to the low-frequency support mode.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot is that the game balls to the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b). There is a difference between the case where a big hit is made based on the incoming ball and the case where a big hit is made based on the incoming ball of the game ball to the second starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Is provided.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. In addition, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop the segment display unit to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. The display mode is determined. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, the electric role opening lottery and the support mode will be described.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a success / failure table (electrical accessory release lottery success / failure table) used when the electrical accessory release lottery is executed.

  FIG. 36 (a) shows an electrical accessory release lottery acceptance / rejection table (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the electric component release lottery success / rejection table (for the low frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric component release counter C4 that is elected to win the electric utility. Value is set. 464 values of 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 to be detached. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) in the low frequency support mode and the electric component release lottery is executed, the winning combination is won with a probability of 1/233. . When the electrification opening lottery is won, the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. The mode of the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 when the low frequency support mode is executed will be described later.

  FIG. 36 (b) shows an electric accessory opening lottery acceptance / rejection table (for high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A, high frequency support mode B). As shown in FIG. 36 (b), in the electric component release lottery success / failure table (for the high frequency support mode), there are 462 values of 0 to 461 as the values of the electric agent release counter C4 that is elected to win the electric utility. Value is set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as values of the electric accessory release counter C4 to be detached. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) in the high-frequency support mode and the electric combination release lottery is executed, the winning combination is won with a probability of 231/233. . When the electrification opening lottery is won, the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is executed. The mode of the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 during the execution of the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B will be described later.

  As described above, the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A, high frequency support mode B) is more likely to win the electric power open lottery than the low frequency support mode, according to the electric component release lottery success / failure table. It is set to be.

  Next, details of the support mode that can be executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of support modes that can be executed by the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 can execute three types of support modes: a low frequency support mode, a high frequency support mode A, and a high frequency support mode B.

[Infrequent support mode]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the low frequency support mode, the winning probability of the electrification opening lottery is 1/233, and the variation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) in the electrifying opening lottery is 10 seconds. That is, the normal symbol starts to fluctuate as the electric role release lottery starts, and the time until the normal symbol is stopped and displayed to notify the lottery result is 10 seconds. In addition, when the electrification opening lottery is won, the time from when the variable time ends to when the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball can flow through the upper surface is 0.1 second. When the electrification opening lottery is won, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 (the time during which the movable piece 53a is kept protruding from the game board 30) is 3 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second start opening 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed.

  In the low frequency support mode, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to be left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a manner in which game balls circulate when the low-frequency support mode is executed. In FIG. 38, the ordinary electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and an open state when represented by a solid line.

  When the player circulates the game ball so as to make a left strike and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120, the game ball that has entered the opening 122 is left-flowed by the distribution rotation unit 125. Allocation is alternately performed between the path R1 and the right channel R2. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 flow out of the opening 123 and enter the first starting port 33a. As shown in FIG. 38B, the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 flow out of the opening 124 after passing through the through gate 35a. In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric character opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a is low (winning probability: 1/233), and the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in the open state. The probability of becoming low is low. Therefore, when the game ball flows out from the opening 124, the normal electric accessory 53 is highly likely to be closed, and the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 enters the first start port 33b. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, the game balls that have entered the sorting mechanism 120 mostly enter the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b, and the first start port 33 (first Game times are triggered by the entry of game balls into the start port 33a and the first start port 33b). In addition, in the low frequency support mode, even when the winning ball is won in the winning combination lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a, the fluctuation time of the winning combination lottery is 10 seconds. In addition, since the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b until it reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 is about 0.3 seconds, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35a that triggered the winning of the game However, it does not enter the second starting port 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53 that has been opened due to the winning. Note that a game ball that has reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 at a timing when the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in an open state may enter the second start port 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53.

  In addition, in the low-frequency support mode, if the game ball is passed so as to pass right and the game ball passes through the through gate 35b, it was executed when the game ball passed through the through gate 35b. The probability of winning in the electrification opening lottery is low (winning probability: 1/233), and the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in the open state is low. Therefore, it is unlikely that the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35b enter the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b, and the second start port 34, and the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35b flow down as they are. The ball enters the out port 43. Temporarily, in the low frequency support mode, the game player passes the game ball so that the game ball passes through the through gate 35b, and the electrification opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. In the low frequency support mode, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 3 seconds, and the game ball that has reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 through the through gate 35b is the second. Since the time required to reach the start port 34 is about 5.0 seconds, before the game ball circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a reaches the second start port 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is A game ball that has been closed and triggered to win the electrification opening lottery does not enter the second start opening 34.

[High frequency support mode A]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the high frequency support mode A, the winning probability of the electrification opening lottery is 231/233, and the variation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) in the electrifying opening lottery is 0.05 seconds. In other words, the normal symbol starts to fluctuate at the same time as the electric character release lottery is started, and the time until the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in order to notify the lottery result is 0.05 seconds. Further, as described above, the time until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball can circulate on the upper surface from the time when the variation time ends when the electrification opening lottery is won is 0. 1 second. When the electrification opening lottery is won, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 3 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second start opening 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed.

  In the high frequency support mode A, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to be left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode in which game balls are distributed when the high-frequency support mode A is executed. In FIG. 39, the ordinary electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an opened state when represented by a solid line.

  When the player circulates the game ball so as to be left-handed and enter the distribution mechanism 120 (opening 122), the game ball that has entered the opening 122 is left by the distribution rotating unit 125. Allocation is alternately performed between the flow path R1 and the right flow path R2. As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 flow out of the opening 123 and enter the first starting port 33a. As shown in FIG. 39B, the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 flow out of the opening 124 after passing through the through gate 35a. In the high frequency support mode A, there is a high probability of winning in the electrification opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a (winning probability: 231/233), and the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened. The probability of becoming a state is high. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and is elected to the electric role opening lottery, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened when the game ball flows out from the opening 124. In order to achieve this, the fluctuation time of the electric role opening lottery in the high frequency support mode A is set to 0.05 seconds. In addition, when the electrification opening lottery is won, the time from when the variable time ends to when the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball can flow through the upper surface is 0.1 second. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a until it reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 0.3 seconds. That is, the electric combination executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a from the time (0.3 seconds) from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a until it reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53. From the time when the variation time of the opening lottery (0.05 seconds) and the electrification opening lottery is won until the variation time ends, the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball can be circulated on the upper surface. When the electrification opening lottery is won because the sum value (0.15 sec) of the time (0.1 sec) is shorter, the ordinary electric accessory 53 when the game ball flows out from the opening 124 Is open, and the game ball that has flowed out of the opening 124 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53 a of the ordinary electric accessory 53.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to allow the game ball flowing out from the opening 124 to flow through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second starting port 34, the normal electric combination in the high frequency support mode A is performed. The opening time of the object 53 is set to 3.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time required for the game ball that has flowed out of the opening 124 and reached the movable piece 53a to flow through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second start port 34 is 2.0 seconds. Accordingly, the game ball that has flowed out of the opening 124 flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53 a and enters the second start port 34. As described above, in the high-frequency support mode A, when the game ball is distributed to the right flow path R2 as compared with the low-frequency support mode, the game ball is second-started with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53. The probability of entering the mouth 34 is high. In the high-frequency support mode A, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 3 seconds, but when one game ball enters the second start port 34, it is closed and is therefore distributed to the right channel R2. When the game ball reaches the ordinary electric combination 53 immediately after the ordinary electric combination 53 is closed, the game ball that has flowed out of the opening 124 enters the first start port 33b. If another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a when one game ball enters the second start port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 is closed in the game ball. As a result, the second start port 34 does not enter the ball but flows further downstream. Accordingly, in the high frequency support mode A, not all of the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 enter the second start port 34. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment passes through the through gate 35b when the player circulates right so as to pass through the through gate 35b in the high frequency support mode A. Thus, the game ball that has reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 is prevented from entering the second starting port 34. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 circulates through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reaches the second start port 34. The average time to complete is 5.0 seconds. On the other hand, as described above, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode A is set to 3.0 seconds. Therefore, even if the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the open ordinary electric accessory 53, the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes while the upper surface of the movable piece 53a is circulating, so that the game Before the ball reaches the second start port 34, the ball is released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and further flows downward, so that the ball does not enter the second start port 34. Therefore, in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the distribution mode of the game balls that enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 is the distribution mode of the game balls that maximizes the player's profit.

[High frequency support mode B]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the high frequency support mode B, the winning probability of the electrification opening lottery is 231/233, and the variation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) in the electrifying opening lottery is 0.05 seconds. In other words, the normal symbol starts to fluctuate at the same time as the electric character release lottery is started, and the time until the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in order to notify the lottery result is 0.05 seconds. Further, as described above, when the electrification opening lottery is won, the time from when the variable time ends until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball can flow through the upper surface is 0. 0. 1 second. When the electrification opening lottery is won, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 6 seconds. However, if one game ball enters the second start opening 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed.

  In the high frequency support mode B, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to pass right through and pass through the through gate 35b.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode in which game balls circulate when the high-frequency support mode B is executed. In FIG. 40, the ordinary electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an opened state when represented by a solid line.

  When the player makes a right turn and distributes the game ball so as to pass through the through gate 35b, an electric role opening lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. In the high frequency support mode B, there is a high probability of winning in the electric combination opening lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 35b (winning probability: 231/233), and the ordinary electric combination 53 is opened. The probability of becoming a state is high. Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35b and wins the electric role opening lottery, the normal electric motor is reached when the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the normal electric role 53. In order for the accessory 53 to be in the open state, the fluctuation time of the electric character opening lottery in the high frequency support mode B is set to 0.05 seconds. In addition, when the electrification opening lottery is won, the time from when the variable time ends to when the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball can flow through the upper surface is 0.1 second. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the average value of the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b until it reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 0.3 seconds. In other words, from the time (0.3 seconds) from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b to when the game ball reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 (0.3 seconds), the electric role is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b. From the time when the variation time of the opening lottery (0.05 seconds) and the electrification opening lottery is won until the variation time ends, the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball can be circulated on the upper surface. Since the sum (0.15 seconds) of the time (0.1 seconds) is shorter, when the electrification opening lottery is won, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the ordinary electrified object 53 At that time, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open, and the game ball that has reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 circulates on the upper surface of the movable piece 53 a of the ordinary electric accessory 53.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to allow the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b and reached the ordinary electric accessory 53 to flow through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second starting port 34, The opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode B is set to 6.0 seconds. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b to reach the ordinary electric accessory 53 to flow through the upper surface of the movable piece 53a and reach the second starting port 34. The average value is 5.0 seconds. Accordingly, the game ball that has flowed out of the opening 124 flows through the upper surface of the movable piece 53 a and enters the second start port 34. In the high-frequency support mode B, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is 6.0 seconds, but it passes through the through gate 35b to close when one game ball enters the second start port 34. When the game ball reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 immediately after the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed, the game ball flows down as it is. That is, the game ball does not enter the second start port 34. If another game ball is circulating on the upper surface of the movable piece 53a when one game ball enters the second start port 34, the normal electric accessory 53 is closed in the game ball. As a result, the second start port 34 does not enter the ball but flows further downstream. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode B, not all of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35b enter the second start port 34.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support B, when the player hits the right, the game ball can be made to enter only the second start port 34 with a high probability. As shown in the distribution table for the first start port and the distribution table for the second start port in FIG. 35, the winning lottery is won in the winning lottery triggered by the game balls entering the first start port 33. In this case, the expected value of the privilege that is given when the player wins the big win in the winning lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34 is higher than the expected value of the privilege that is given in this case. In the high-frequency support mode B, if the game balls are distributed so as to be left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120, the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 are used. As the game balls enter alternately, the expectation of the privilege given when winning the jackpot is higher than the case where the game ball is inserted only at the second start port 34 with a high probability by making a right hit. The value is low. Therefore, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, the distribution mode of the game ball that makes a right turn and passes through the through gate 35b is the distribution mode of the game ball that maximizes the player's profit.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port) when the game balls are distributed so as to maximize the profit of the player. 33b) a state in which a game ball enters only (low frequency support mode state), a state in which game balls enter the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 alternately (high frequency support mode A state) ), Three states can be created: a state in which a game ball enters only the second start port 34 (a state of the high-frequency support mode B).

B3. Game Flow Next, a game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of games in the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in step F101, when the player starts playing, the lottery mode in the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. At this time, the pachinko machine 10 performs an effect that urges the player to make a left-hand hit and cause the game ball to enter the sorting mechanism 120 (opening 122).

  As described above, in the low-frequency support mode, the game balls that have entered the sorting mechanism 120 enter the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b in most cases and perform the first start. Game times are triggered by the entry of game balls into the mouth 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). The state of step F101 is executed until a big win is won in the game round triggered by the game ball entering the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) (F102: NO ).

  In the state of step F101, if a big win is won in the game times triggered by the game balls entering the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) (F102: YES), A round game corresponding to the type is executed (F103). For example, if the jackpot type is 16R probability variable jackpot B, the variable winning device 54 performs an opening / closing operation to execute a round game for 16 rounds, and in the case of 8R probability variable jackpot A and 8R normal jackpot A, The variable winning device 54 performs an opening / closing operation, and a round game for 8 rounds is executed.

  After the round game is over, the game shifts to a different game state for each jackpot type that was won earlier. When the jackpot type is jackpot B (F104: YES), the process proceeds to step F111. That is, in the case of the jackpot type that shifts to the high-frequency support mode B after the round game ends, the process proceeds to step F111.

  In step F104, when the jackpot type is not jackpot B (F104: NO), the process proceeds to step F105. That is, it is a case of a jackpot type that shifts to the state of the high frequency support mode A after the end of the round game, and specifically, a game to the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). When the 8R probability variable jackpot A and 8R normal jackpot A are won in the game times executed with the ball entering, the process proceeds to step F105.

  In step F105, if the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot (F105: YES), the process proceeds to step F109, and if it is not a probable jackpot, that is, a normal jackpot (for example, 8R normal jackpot A) (F105: NO). ), And proceeds to Step F106.

  In step F106, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode A. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 performs an effect that urges the player to make a left-hand strike and cause the game ball to enter the sorting mechanism 120 (opening 122).

  As described above, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls that have entered the sorting mechanism 120 are alternately provided to the first start port 33 (first start port 33a) and the second start port 34. Enter the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, game times are triggered by the entry of the game balls in the order in which the game balls enter the respective start openings. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a) and the second start port 34 alternately, the game ball enters the first start port 33 as an opportunity. The game times to be executed and the game times triggered by the entry of the game balls into the second start opening 34 are alternately executed.

  In the high frequency support mode A in the state of step F106, the game times triggered by the game balls entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) or the second start port 34 are as follows. Continue until 100 times have been executed (F107: N0 → F108: NO), and if the game has not been won by 100 times (F107: NO → F108: YES), go to step F101 Return to the state shown. That is, it returns to the state of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

  On the other hand, in the state of step F106, the game times triggered by the game balls entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) or the second start port 34 are executed 100 times. If the jackpot is won by the time (F107: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round game corresponding to the jackpot type is executed.

  In step F105, when the jackpot type is a probable jackpot (F105: YES), the process proceeds to step F109.

  In step F109, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode A. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 performs an effect that urges the player to make a left-hand strike and cause the game ball to enter the sorting mechanism 120 (opening 122).

  The state of step F109 is the high frequency support mode A. As described above, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls that have entered the sorting mechanism 120 are alternately provided to the first start port 33 (first start port 33a) and the second start port 34. Enter the ball. In the pachinko machine 10, game times are triggered by the entry of the game balls in the order in which the game balls enter the respective start openings. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first start port 33 (first start port 33a) and the second start port 34 alternately, the game ball enters the first start port 33 as an opportunity. The game times to be executed and the game times triggered by the entry of the game balls into the second start opening 34 are alternately executed.

  Since the state of step F109 is the high probability mode, the state of the high frequency support mode A continues until a big win is won in the executed game times (F110: NO).

  In the state of Step F109, when a big win is won in a game round triggered by a game ball entering the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) or second start port 34 (F110: YES), the process proceeds to step F103, and a round game corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed.

  In step F104, when the jackpot type is jackpot B (F104: YES), the process proceeds to step F111. Specifically, when the game round executed with the game ball entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33b) is won, 2 When the game round executed with the game ball entering the starting port 34 is won, the process proceeds to step F111 when the 16R probability variation jackpot B, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 8R normal jackpot B is won.

  In step F111, when the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot B (F111: YES), the process proceeds to step F112.

  In step F112, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode B. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 performs an effect that urges the player to make a right strike and have the game ball enter the sorting mechanism 120 (opening 122).

  In the state of the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 b enters the second start port 34 with the assistance of the ordinary electric accessory 53. Therefore, game times are triggered by the entry of game balls into the second start port 34.

  Since step F112 is a high probability mode, the state of the high frequency support mode B continues until a big win is won in the game times to be executed (F113: NO).

  In the state of Step F112, when a big win is won in the game round triggered by the game ball entering the second start opening 34 (F113: YES), the process proceeds to Step F103, and the round corresponding to the type of the big win A game is executed.

  In step F111, when the jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot B (F111: NO), the process proceeds to step F114.

  In step F114, after the round game (F103) ends, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode B. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 performs an effect that urges the player to make a left-hand strike and cause the game ball to enter the sorting mechanism 120 (opening 122).

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 b is assisted by the ordinary electric accessory 53 and enters the second start port 34. Therefore, game times are triggered by the entry of game balls into the second start port 34.

  The high-frequency support mode B in the state of step F114 continues until the game times triggered by the game balls entering the second start port 34 are executed 100 times (F115: N0 → F116: NO). If the jackpot is not won by 100 times (F115: NO → F116: YES), the process returns to the state shown in step F101. That is, it returns to the state of the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

  On the other hand, in the state of step F114, when a big win is won by 100 times when the game times triggered by the game balls entering the second start port 34 are executed (F115: YES), the process goes to step F103. The round game according to the type of jackpot is executed.

  The game flow in the pachinko machine 10 has been described above. As described in the flow of the game, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a, the first start port 33) when the game ball is distributed so as to maximize the profit of the player. A state in which a game ball enters only the first start port 33b (low frequency support mode state), a state in which game balls enter the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 alternately (high frequency support mode) A state), and the game proceeds while transitioning between three states, a state in which a game ball enters only the second start opening 34 (state of the high frequency support mode B).

  Here, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects produced by the characteristics will be described by comparison with a conventional pachinko machine. When winning a win (including a big win and a small win if a small win is set) in the win lottery executed with the game ball entering the first starting point. The expected value of a privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) is set as the first privilege expected value, and a winning win (a jackpot winning win, in a winning lottery executed when a game ball enters the second starting port) In addition, an expected value of a privilege (for example, the number of award balls to be paid out) given when a small-winning winning is set (including a small-winning winning) is set as the second privilege expected value. In addition, the expected value of benefits granted when winning at the normal time is assumed as the expected value at normal times, and the expected value of privileges granted when winning at the time of the high frequency support mode is the expected value of benefits at the time of high support And

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine (hereinafter also referred to as “conventional pachinko machine”) provided with a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls to a first start port and a second start port. In the conventional normal state (for example, the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) when the game is started, the conventional pachinko machine distributes the game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism, and the first start port and the second start. A game ball is alternately placed in the mouth. When the mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory) operates at a high frequency, so that the game ball enters the second starting port with high probability without using the distribution means. Let

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the bonus expectation value at the time of high support is higher than the bonus expectation value at the normal time and an attempt is made to increase the difference, it is inevitably necessary to increase the bonus expectation value at the time of high support. The bonus expectation value needs to be increased, but if the second privilege expectation value is increased, the bonus expectation value at the normal time will also increase (in a normal state, a game ball enters the first start port and the second start port) Because a lottery is performed by hitting a ball). Even if the first privilege expectation value is reduced, the normal benefit expectation value is an average of the first benefit expectation value and the second benefit expectation value, so the effect of reducing the first benefit expectation value is It gets smaller.

  In addition, when there are restrictions on the amount of benefits that can be granted per unit time, if the expected benefit value during normal times is relatively large, the expected benefit value at high support is required to adjust within the scope of the regulation. Need to be small. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the normal benefit expectation value and the high support benefit expectation value. In other words, among the game states excluding the opening / closing execution mode, it is not possible to provide a large swing in the profits obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. As a result, the player's expectation is increased when the normal state (the normal gaming state, the state with the smallest benefit expectation value) is changed to the high-frequency support mode (the best gaming state, the state with the highest benefit expectation value). It cannot be triggered.

  On the other hand, in the normal state, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment circulates the game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, but since the game balls enter only the first start port 33a with high probability, By setting the first benefit expectation value low, the normal benefit expectation value can be lowered. Furthermore, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, since the game ball enters the second start port 34 with a high probability when the player hits the right hand, the second benefit expectation value should be set high. By this, the expected value at the time of high support in the high frequency support B can be increased. In other words, among the gaming states excluding the opening / closing execution mode, a large swing can be provided in the profit that the player can obtain between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state. Furthermore, in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the game balls are alternately entered into the first start port 33a and the second start port 34. Expected value for bonuses during high support (high frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between the expected bonus value during normal times and the expected bonus value during high support (in high frequency support mode B), normal state → high frequency support When the game progresses in the flow of the game such as mode A → high frequency support mode B, the value of the expected benefit value to be given is gradually increased, and the game state except for the opening / closing execution mode is normal. It is possible to provide a large range in the profits obtained by the player between the gaming state and the best gaming state.

  Furthermore, when there is a restriction on the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time, the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time as a whole is set by setting the first privilege expected value low. It is possible to adjust, and it is possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first privilege expected value and the second privilege expected value is increased. In other words, out of the game state excluding the opening / closing execution mode, it can be granted per unit time while ensuring a large swing in the difference in profits obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state It becomes easy to adjust the size of a special privilege within the range of regulation.

  In addition, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects exerted by the characteristics are compared with a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) provided with a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls to the first start port and the second start port. As described above, the effect is not only effective for the conventional pachinko machines exemplified above, but for a pachinko machine having two or more entrance parts that trigger different types of lotteries. And has the effect.

B4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described, and then processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  In step S20101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensors is determined, and the detection information (entrance detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step S20102.

  In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20103.

  In step S20103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20104. Note that the variation type counter CS updates its value in normal processing (FIG. 48) described later.

  In step S20104, the entrance processing for the start port accompanying the entrance into the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b) and the second start port 34 is executed. Details of the starting ball entry processing in step S20104 will be described later. After executing step S20104, the process proceeds to step S20105.

  In step S20105, a through entry process for entering through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is executed. Details of the through ball entry processing in step S20105 will be described later. After executing step S20105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Pick-up processing for starter>
Next, the ball entering process for the start port will be described. The starting ball entry processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 42: S20104).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for a start port. In step S20201, the detection sensor corresponding to the first start port 33 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). Judge by state. If it is determined in step S20201 that a game ball has entered the first start port 33 (S20201: YES), the process proceeds to step S20202, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set the command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20203.

  In step S20203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management controller on the game hall side that a game ball has entered the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). I do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20204.

  In step S20204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start hold number RaN) that is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The first start reserve number RaN indicates the number of reserves based on the ball entering the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20209.

  If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has not entered the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205, and the game ball Whether or not has entered the second start port 34 is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second start port 34.

  If it is determined in step S20205 that a game ball has entered the second start opening 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20205 that the game ball has not entered the second start port 34 (S20205: NO), the start processing for the start port is terminated.

  In step S20207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20208.

  In step S20208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The second start reserved number RbN indicates the reserved number based on winning in the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20209.

  In step S20209, it is determined whether the number N of start suspensions (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S20209, when the number N of starting suspension is not less than the upper limit value (S20209: NO), the ball entry processing for the starting port is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S20209, when the number N of starting suspension is less than the upper limit value (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210, and 1 is added to the number N of starting suspensions in the corresponding suspension area, and then the process proceeds to step S20211. 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved number CRN). The total reserved number CRN indicates the total value of the first start reserved number RaN and the second start reserved number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20212.

  In step S20212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42), and the variation type counter CS updated in the normal processing (FIG. 48) is obtained. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reserved area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as a processing target, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42), and Each value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. When the second start hold number RbN is set as a processing target, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42). Each value of CS is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the second start reservation number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. After executing Step S20212, the process proceeds to Step S20213.

  In step S20213, a destination determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. This type of determination is performed before the hold information is subject to a lottery by the main control device 60, such as the type of the game, the presence / absence of reach, and the variation time of the game times. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing Step S20213, the process proceeds to Step S20214.

  In step S20214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (destination determination information) of the destination determination process executed based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS ) As a pending command.

  The hold command is based on the occurrence of a ball entering the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) or the second start port 34, and on hold information acquired based on the input ball. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm the determination result (predetermined determination information) by the prior determination processing before the hold information is subject to the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 48: step S20703) of a normal process described later.

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b), the symbol display device 41 is provided. A command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 corresponding to the increase in the number of hold is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the second start port 34 is received, the sound emission control device 90 displays the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 as the number of hold. A command for changing in accordance with the increase is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the start port.

<First determination processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The pre-determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for a ball entry process for the start port (FIG. 43: S20213).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, based on the hold information, the hold information is mainly used to determine whether or not the winning lottery is determined, whether the jackpot type is determined, whether the reach is generated, whether the game time is changed, etc. This is a process executed before the winning lottery by the control device 60.

  In step S20301, a jackpot / reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not a winning lottery is successful, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot / reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S20301, the process proceeds to step S20302.

  In step S20302, a variable time information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process for determining the variation time of game times. Details of the variable time information acquisition process will be described later.

  After executing step S20302, the destination determination process is terminated.

<Obtain and reach information acquisition processing>
Next, the jackpot / reach information acquisition process will be described. The jackpot / reach information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 44: S20301) of the previous determination processing.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a jackpot / reach information acquisition process. In step S20401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area is read out by entering the starting port in the starting port entering process (FIG. 43). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20402, and the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as a game time is determined. Specifically, whether or not there is a probable big hit that occurs before the winning lottery by the current entry by reading the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed by the entry before the current entry from the corresponding storage area To determine the lottery mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as the game time.

  In step S20402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as a game time (S20402: YES), the process proceeds to step S20403, and the pass / fail table is stored. The success / failure table for the low probability mode stored in the area 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20405, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20402 that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the winning lottery by the current entry is executed as a game time (S20402: NO), the process proceeds to step S20404, and the high probability mode. As a result of referring to the success / failure table for use, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20405, and it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode.

  In step S20405, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S20405: YES), the process proceeds to step S20406, and is stored in the storage area by entering the current start port. The value of the hit jackpot type counter C2 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20407, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, in the case where the jackpot type counter C2 that has been distributed this time has been acquired based on entering the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b). Refers to the first start port distribution table, and if it is acquired based on the ball entering the second start port 34, refers to the second start port distribution table. After executing Step S20407, the process proceeds to Step S20408.

  In step S20408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S20408 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S20408: YES), the process proceeds to step S20409, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20408 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S20408: NO), the process proceeds to step S20410, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated.

  In step S20405, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S20405: NO), the process proceeds to step S20411 and enters the storage area by entering the starting port this time. The stored value of the reach random number counter C3 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20412, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20413, where it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach as a result of referring to the reach determination table.

  In step S20413, when it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach (S20413: YES), the process proceeds to step S20414, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the destination determination process result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20413 that the generation of the reach is not supported (S20413: NO), the destination determination process is terminated as it is.

<Variation time information acquisition processing>
Next, the variable time information acquisition process will be described. The fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the previous determination process (FIG. 44: S20302).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition process. In step S20501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area is acquired by entering the starting port in the starting port entering process (FIG. 43). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20502.

  In step S20502, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery for the current game round is a win. Specifically, the presence / absence of a jackpot is determined based on the lottery result of the winning lottery determined by the jackpot / reach information acquisition process. If it is a jackpot (S20502: YES), the process proceeds to step S20503.

  In step S20503, referring to the jackpot variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the present variation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S20503, the process proceeds to step S20507.

  In step S20507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the fluctuation time information acquisition process ends.

  If it is determined in step S20502 that the lottery result of the winning lottery is not a big win (step S20502: NO), the process proceeds to step S20504, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs. If it is determined in step S20504 that a reach will occur (S20504: YES), the process proceeds to step S20505.

  In step S20505, referring to the reach occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20507, where the obtained variation time information is stored in the previous determination process result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the present variation time information acquisition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S20504 that no reach occurs in the current game round (step S20504: NO), the process proceeds to step S20506, and the reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is displayed. Referring to, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20507, where the obtained variation time information is stored in the previous determination process result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the present variation time information acquisition process is terminated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN are larger. Yes. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to is determined by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game times. Is different.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN are larger. However, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the variation time is set to be shorter as the value of the total reserved number CRN is larger. Further, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved pieces CRN may be used. The smaller the total number of reserved pieces CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. When the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start hold numbers RbN is larger. When the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of the second start reserved number RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant number without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach is not generated so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode is used A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, and may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variation time that is easy to select and the variation time that is difficult to select at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach reach may be different Good. Further, a variation time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation time table for normal jackpot, a variation time table for outreach and a variation time table for complete losing may be set individually.

<Throwing processing for through>
Next, a through ball entry process will be described. The through ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a timer interruption process subroutine (FIG. 42: step S20105).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a through ball entry process. In step S20601, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed) the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). If it is determined in step S20601 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (S20601: YES), the process proceeds to step S20602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20601 that no game ball has entered the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) (S20601: NO), the through processing for this through is terminated.

  In step S20602, it is determined whether or not the electric utility processing execution flag is ON. The process for executing a power combination flag is ON when a power combination release lottery is executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). When the lottery result is out of place, it is turned OFF after setting the outlier display, and when the lottery result of the electrification opening lottery is win, the setting of the win display and the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 53 executed in accordance with the win are performed. It is turned OFF after the process is completed. Hereinafter, an electric role opening lottery triggered by the passing of a game ball through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b), a display of a lottery result (winning / losing) executed in accordance with the lottery, and The process of opening the ordinary electric accessory 53 that is executed in the case of winning is also referred to as an electric utility process. In the present embodiment, the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) does not hold the passage of the game ball. That is, a new through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is executed during a period in which the processing for the electrical role triggered by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) is executed. Even if a game ball enters the ball, the electric role process triggered by the ball is not executed.

  If it is determined in step S20602 that the power combination process execution flag is not ON (S20602: NO), the process proceeds to step S20603, and the power combination process execution flag is turned ON. After executing step S20603, the process proceeds to step S20604. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20602 that the power processing execution flag is ON (S20602: YES), the through-throwing ball entry processing is terminated.

  In step S20604, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 42) is moved to the electric accessory execution area 64e. Thereafter, the through-ball entering process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S20701, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initial setting of each control device upon power-on, determination of the validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20702.

  In step S20702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting a demonstration video for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20703.

  In step S20703, output data such as a startup command set in step S20702, a timer interrupt process, or a command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S20703, the process proceeds to step S20704.

  In step S20704, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20705.

  In step S20705, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S20706. In step S20706, a game times control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, winning lottery, setting of symbol change display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing Step S20706, the process proceeds to Step S20707.

  In step S20707, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20708.

  In step S20708, a power combination support process for controlling the driving of the ordinary electric charge 53 is executed. In the electric combination support process, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric combination 53 is opened. The details of the power combination support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20709.

  In step S20709, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step S20703). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached. If it is determined in step S20709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S20709: NO), in steps S20710 and S20711, the next normal process execution timing is reached. The random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time. Specifically, in step S20710, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S20711, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S20709: YES), the process returns to step S20703, and the processes from step S20703 to step S20708 are performed. Run.

  Since the execution time of each process from step S20703 to step S20708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 48: S20706) of the normal process.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step S20801, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening / closing execution mode flag is a flag that is turned ON when the opening / closing execution mode starts and turned OFF when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  If it is determined in step S20801 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (S20801: YES), it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in effect, and the present game control is performed without executing any of the processes after step S20802. The process ends. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not the special figure starting port 51 has entered. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20801 that the opening / closing execution mode is not in effect (S20801: NO), the process proceeds to step S20802.

  In step S20802, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b is in a variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various jackpot flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned on when the variable display is started for either the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display is finished.

  If it is determined in step S20802 that the main display unit 45 is not in a variable display (S20802: NO), the process proceeds to a game round start process in steps S20803 to S20805. In step S20803, it is determined whether or not the reserved number CRN is “0”. The case where the reserved number CRN is “0” means that the reserved number is “0” for any of the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b) and the second start port 34. means. Therefore, if it is determined in step S20803 that the reserved number CRN is “0” (S20803: YES), this game number control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20803 that the reserved number CRN is not “0” (S20803: NO), the process proceeds to step S20804.

  In step S20804, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first reserved area Ra or the second reserved area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S20805, change start processing for starting change display on the main display unit 45 and change display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. Details of the variation start process will be described later. After executing Step S20805, the game times control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S20802 that the main display unit 45 is in a variable display (S20802: YES), processing for proceeding game times in steps S20806 to S20815 is executed.

  In step S20806, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. As described above, the variation time is the time from when the symbol sequence starts to vary until all the symbol sequences are stopped, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S20806, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time information stored in the variation time counter area (various counter area 64f) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the variation time information is set in the variation time setting process (FIG. 52) described later. The value of the set variation time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started.

  If it is determined in step S20806 that the variation time has not elapsed (S20806: NO), the process proceeds to step S20807, and the variation display process is executed. The variation display process is a process of changing the display mode in the symbol display unit related to the current game time. After executing step S20807, the game times control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S20806 that the variation time has elapsed (S20806: YES), the process proceeds to step S20808, and variation end processing is executed. In the variation end process, the symbol display unit is displayed so that the symbol display to be displayed on the symbol display unit related to the current game round is displayed on the symbol display unit determined in the variation start process (FIG. 51) described later. Control display. After executing Step S20808, the process proceeds to Step S20809.

  In step S20809, it is determined whether or not any jackpot flag (in this embodiment, 16R probability variable jackpot B flag, 8R probability variable jackpot B flag, 8R probability variable jackpot flag A, 8R normal jackpot A flag) is ON. . If any jackpot flag is ON in step S20809 (S20809: YES), the process proceeds to step S20810.

  In step S20810, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. On the other hand, if none of the jackpot flags is ON in step S20809 (S20809: NO), the process proceeds to step S20811.

  In step S20811, 1 is subtracted from the value of the game number counter PNC. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed with the number of games limited. After executing Step S20811, the process proceeds to Step S20812.

  In step S20812, it is determined whether the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S20812 that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S20812: NO), the game number control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S20812 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S20812: YES), the process proceeds to step S20813, and it is determined whether or not the value of the game number counter PNC is zero.

  If it is determined in step S20813 that the value of the game number counter PNC is not 0 (S20813: NO), the game number control process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S20813 that the value of the game number counter PNC is 0 (S20813: YES), the process proceeds to step S20814, and the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20815 to set a low frequency support mode command. The low frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: step S20703) of the normal process. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the low frequency support mode command recognizes that the support mode has shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and executes an effect corresponding to the low frequency support mode. After executing Step S20815, the game times control process is terminated.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 49: S20804).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S20901, it is determined whether or not the reserved area that is the processing target for executing the data setting process is the first reserved area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in time series in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 32), the hold information stored first (the hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is stored first in the hold information (first area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored in time series in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 32). If it is stored in the holding area prior to the holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra. On the other hand, the first hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is earlier than the first hold information stored in the first hold area Ra in time series. When the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the processing of step S20901, the hold information can be processed in the order stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

  If it is determined in step S20901 that the processing target reserved area is the first reserved area Ra (step S20901: YES), the data setting process for the first reserved area in steps S20902 to S20907 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20901 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step S20901: NO). ), The data setting process for the second reserved area in steps S20908 to S20913 is executed.

  In step S20902, after subtracting 1 from the first start hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra, the process proceeds to step S20903, where 1 is subtracted from the total hold number CRN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20904. In step S20904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20905.

  In step S20905, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing Step S20905, the process proceeds to Step S20906.

  In step S20906, when the 2nd symbol display part flag of various flag storage areas 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when not ON, the state is maintained. The second symbol display portion flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the current variation display is the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20907.

  In step S20907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, corresponding to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the first reserved area Ra, that is, the first start port 33. A command at the time of shift including information indicating that the command is present is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S20907 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 corresponding to the decrease in the number of hold to the display control device 100. To do. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

  In step S20901, when it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step S20901: NO), The process proceeds to step S20908.

  In step S20908, 1 is subtracted from the second start holding number RbN of the second holding area Rb. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20909. In step S20909, 1 is subtracted from the total reserved number CRN, the process proceeds to step S20910, and the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20911.

  In step S20911, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing step S20911, the process proceeds to step S20912.

  In step S20912, when the second symbol display part flag of the various flag storage areas 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20913.

  In step S20913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, corresponding to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, the second start port 34. A command at the time of shift including information indicating that the command is present is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S20913 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 gives a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 49: S20805).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the variation start process. In step S21001, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, the high probability mode flag is turned on when the open / close execution mode related to the winning of the probable big hit is completed. After that, it is turned OFF when a normal jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S21001 that the mode is the high probability mode (S21001: YES), the process proceeds to step S21002.

  In step S21002, the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. Determine whether. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S21001: NO), the process proceeds to step S21003.

  In step S21003, the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE coincides with the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. Determine whether. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21004.

  In step S21004, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S21002 or step S21003 is a big win. In step S21004, in the case where the result of the determination of success / failure is a jackpot winning (S21004: YES), in step S21005 to step S21012, in order to set the processing for setting the game result in the case of the jackpot winning and the stop result. Execute the process.

  In step S21005, it is determined whether the 2nd symbol display part flag of RAM64 is ON. If it is determined in step S21005 that the second symbol display unit flag is not ON (S21005: NO), the process proceeds to step S21006, and the first start port allocation table (see FIG. 35A) is referred to. To make a distribution decision. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in any of the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot B, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot A, and the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot A. It is determined whether or not.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21005 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S21005: YES), the process proceeds to step S21007, and the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 35B). Referring to, perform the distribution determination. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot B, the numerical range of the 8R probability variation jackpot B, or the 8R normal jackpot B To do. After executing the process of step S21006 or step S21007. The process proceeds to step S21008.

  In step S21008, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step S21008 that the game result is a probable big hit (S21008: YES), the process proceeds to step S21009.

  In step S21009, a stop result setting process for probability variation big hit is executed. The stop result setting process for the probable jackpot is a change in the state in which any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round that will be won for the probable jackpot. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stoppage table for probability variation jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S21009, the process proceeds to Step S21010.

  In step S21010, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 (big jackpot type flag) is turned ON. Specifically, when the 16R probability variation jackpot B is set, the 16R probability variation jackpot B flag is turned ON, when the 8R probability variation jackpot B is set, the 8R probability variation jackpot B flag is turned ON, and when the 8R probability variation jackpot A is set. Turn ON the 8R probability variation jackpot A flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21008 that the jackpot type assigned in step S21006 or step S21007 is not a probabilistic jackpot (S21008: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is a normal jackpot, The process proceeds to S21011.

  In step S21011, a normal jackpot stop result setting process is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process varies in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21006 or step S21007 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S21011, the process proceeds to Step S21012.

  In step S21012, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step S21006 or step S21007 (big jackpot type flag) is turned ON. Specifically, the 8R normal big hit B flag is turned ON when the 8R normal big hit B is set, and the 8R normal big hit A flag is turned ON when the 8R normal big hit A is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21016.

  In step S21004, when the result of the winning lottery in step S21002 or step S21003 is not a big win, the process proceeds to step S21013, and it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the game times. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as the occurrence of reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether you are doing it.

  In step S21013, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the game time (S21013: YES), the process proceeds to step S21014.

  In step S21014, a stop result setting process for reach is executed. A process for setting which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display part 37a or the second symbol display part 37b to end the variable display in the current game round that is the stop result for reach. is there. Specifically, the stop result data address information corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the reach stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21014, the process proceeds to step S21016.

  If it is determined in step S21013 that no reach occurs in the game time (S21013: NO), the process proceeds to step S21015.

  In step S21015, an outage stop result setting process is executed. The stop result setting process for off time is to end the variable display in a state where any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round that results in a loss. This is a process for setting. Specifically, the stop result data address information corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for outage in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S21015, the process proceeds to Step S21016.

  In step S21016, a variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process is to set a variable time, which is the time required for the current game play in the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b, based on whether or not a big hit or a reach has occurred. It is processing of. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S21016, the process proceeds to Step S21017.

  In step S21017, it is determined whether the 2nd symbol display part flag of RAM64 is ON. If it is determined in step S21017 that the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S21017: NO), the process proceeds to step S21018, and the first variation command is set. The first change command indicates that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on entering the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b). And information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the variation time set in step S21016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21017 that the second symbol display unit flag is ON (S21017: YES), the process proceeds to step S21019, and the second variation command is set. The second change command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning at the second start port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And information on the variation time set in step S21016. After executing Step S21018 or Step S21019, the process proceeds to Step S21020.

  In step S21020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on presence / absence of a jackpot and the presence / absence of reach as a result of the allocation determination. That is, in the type command, as information on the jackpot type, 16R probability variation jackpot B information, 8R probability variation jackpot B information, 8R probability variation jackpot A information, 8R normal jackpot B information, 8R ordinary jackpot B information, or , Information on presence / absence of reach and information on outage result are included.

  The variation command and type command set in steps S21018 to S21020 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). Based on the received change command and type command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect at the game time and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing Step S21020, the process proceeds to Step S21021.

  In step S21021, the variation display of symbols is started on the result display unit corresponding to the current game time out of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second symbol display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is identified as the first symbol display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the 2nd symbol display part flag is ON, it specifies that the result display part corresponding to this game time is the 2nd symbol display part 37b, and starts a variable display. After executing step S21021, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The change time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a change start process subroutine (FIG. 51: S21016).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the change time setting process. In step S21101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21102.

  In step S21102, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery for the current game round is a win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If any flag is ON (S21102: YES), the process proceeds to step S21103.

  In step S21103, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the big hit variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21107, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21102 that the winning lottery related to the current game round is not a win (S21102: NO), the flow proceeds to step S21104, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S21104) is executed when the winning lottery relating to the current game round is not won in the above step S21102, in step S21104, a reach occurs among the gaming rounds not won in the winning lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach has occurred (S21104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S21105. Note that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when the occurrence of reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3 is specified.

  In step S21105, referring to the reach occurrence change time table stored in the change time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, change time information corresponding to the value of the current change type counter CS is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating reach is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21107, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21104 that no reach occurs in the current game round (S21104: NO), the process proceeds to step S21106, and the change time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the change time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21107, and the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table indicates that the fluctuation time increases as the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN increase. It is set to be shorter. That is, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the data of the variation time table to be referred to is determined by the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN when determining the variation time of the game times. Is different.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN are larger. However, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the variation time is set to be shorter as the value of the total reserved number CRN is larger. Further, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the total number of reserved pieces CRN may be used. The smaller the total number of reserved pieces CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. When the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start hold numbers RbN is larger. When the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of the second start reserved number RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant number without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach is not generated so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode is used A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, and may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variation time that is easy to select and the variation time that is difficult to select at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach reach may be different Good. Further, a variation time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation time table for normal jackpot, a variation time table for outreach and a variation time table for complete losing may be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 48: S20707).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. In step S22101, it is determined whether an ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing process period in the opening / closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing an ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S2211 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21201: NO), the process proceeds to step S21202, and it is determined whether the opening / closing process period flag is ON. As described above, the opening / closing process period flag is turned ON when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing process period, and is turned OFF when the opening / closing process period is ended.

  If it is determined in step S21202 that the opening / closing process period flag is not ON (S21202: NO), the process proceeds to step S21203, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

  If it is determined in step S21203 that the opening period flag is not ON (S21203: NO), the process proceeds to step S21204, and it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game time that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is ended, and is turned OFF when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  If it is determined in step S21204 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (S21204: YES), the process proceeds to step S21205. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21204 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (S21204: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  In step S21205, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. The high probability mode flag is turned OFF in order to set the lottery mode during execution of the opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the jackpot is won as a trigger. After executing Step S21205, the process proceeds to Step S21206.

  In step S21206, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. The high-frequency support mode flag is set to OFF in order to set the support mode in the open / close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot is won, to the low-frequency support mode. After executing Step S21206, the process proceeds to Step S21207.

  In step S21207, an opening / closing execution mode start command is set. The opening / closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening / closing execution mode is started in response to the big win. The opening / closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 48: step S20703). After executing Step S21207, the process proceeds to Step S21208.

  In step S21208, an open / close scenario setting process is executed. The open / close scenario setting process is a process for setting an open / close scenario in which an opening pattern of the open / close door 54b is set in a round game. In this embodiment, the opening time of the open / close door 54b in one round game is 30 seconds. However, even before 30 seconds have elapsed since the opening / closing door 54b is opened, the opening / closing door 54b is closed when nine game balls enter the big winning opening 54a. In the present embodiment, such an opening pattern of the open / close door 54b is set in the open / close scenario. In the open / close scenario setting process, an open / close scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set. For example, if 16R probability variation big hit B, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 54b for 16 rounds is set in the opening / closing scenario, and if 8R probability variation big hit A, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 54b for eight rounds is set in the opening / closing scenario. Is set to After executing Step S21208, the process proceeds to Step S21209.

  In step S21209, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the time length of the opening period in the special gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the opening timer counter area as the opening time. After executing step S21209, the process proceeds to step S21210.

  In step S21210, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the jackpot type, and information on the jackpot that triggered the execution of the current opening / closing execution mode. Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the presentation corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S21210, the process proceeds to step S21211, and the opening period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2203 that the opening period flag is ON (S2203: YES), the process proceeds to step S21212.

  In step S21212, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening timer counter area T set in the opening time setting process is “0”. If it is determined in step S21212 that the opening period has ended (S21212: YES), the process proceeds to step S21213, and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21214.

  In step S21214, a round display start process for informing the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing step S21214, the process proceeds to step S21215.

  In step S21215, the open / close processing period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21202 that the opening / closing process period flag is ON (S21202: YES), the process proceeds to step S21216, and the big prize opening / closing process is executed. The big prize opening / closing process will be described later. After executing Step S21216, the process proceeds to Step S21217.

  In step S21217, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening / closing process has been completed. If it is determined that the special winning opening / closing process has been completed (S21217: YES), the process proceeds to step S21218. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21217 that the big prize opening / closing process has not ended (S21217: NO), the gaming state transition process is ended as it is.

  In step S21218, the opening / closing process period flag is turned OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S21219.

  In step S21219, a round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step S21219, the process proceeds to Step S21220.

  In step S21220, an ending time setting process is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an ending period in the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as an ending time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the ending timer counter as the ending time. After executing Step S21220, the process proceeds to Step S21221.

  In step S21221, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step 40703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). The sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period based on receiving the ending command. After executing Step S21221, the process proceeds to Step S21222.

  In step S21222, the ending period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2201 that the ending period flag is ON (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S21223.

  In step S21223, it is determined whether or not the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21220), it is determined whether or not the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is “0”. If it is determined in step S21223 that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is “0” (S21223: YES), the process proceeds to step S21224.

  In step S21224, the ending period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21225, and a transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21225, the process proceeds to step S21226, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21227, and an opening / closing execution mode end command is set. The opening / closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening / closing execution mode has ended. The opening / closing execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20703 in the normal process (FIG. 48). Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21223 that the value of the ending timer counter set as the ending time is not “0” (S21223: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the prize winning opening / closing process will be described. The big prize opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 53: S21216) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process. In step S23101, it is determined whether the open / close door 54b is open. If it is determined in step S23101 that the open / close door 54b is not open (S21301: NO), the process proceeds to step S21302.

  In step S21302, it is determined whether the opening condition of the open / close door 54b is satisfied. Specifically, the open / close scenario set by the open / close scenario setting process (FIG. 53: S21208) is read, and it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the open / close door 54b. If it is determined in step S21302 that the opening / closing door 54b opening condition is satisfied (S21302: YES), the process proceeds to step S21303.

  In step S21303, the open / close door 54b is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21304.

  In step S21304, an open / close door opening command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening / closing door 54b has been opened. The opening / closing door opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: S20703) of the normal process. After step S21304 is executed, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21302 that the opening condition of the open / close door 54b is not satisfied (S21302: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2301 that the open / close door 54b is open (S21301: YES), the process proceeds to step S21305.

  In step S21305, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the open / close door 54b is satisfied. The closing condition of the open / close door 54b is that the continuous open time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) of the open / close door 54b set in the open / close scenario has elapsed, or the number set in advance in the special winning opening 54a (this implementation) This is established when it is detected that nine game balls have entered. If it is determined in step S21305 that the closing condition of the open / close door 54b is satisfied (S21305: YES), the process proceeds to step S21306.

  In step S21306, the open / close door 54b is closed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21307.

  In step S21307, a door closing command is set. The open / close door close command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the open / close door 54b is closed. The opening / closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: S20303) of the normal process. After executing step S21307, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21305 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 54b is not satisfied (S21305: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 53: S21225).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S21401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag corresponding to the probability change jackpot is turned ON as a jackpot flag in the RAM 64.

  If it is determined in step S21401 that the jackpot flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot set in the RAM 64 is ON (S21401: YES), the process proceeds to step S21402, and the high probability mode flag is turned ON. After executing Step S21402, the process proceeds to Step S21403.

  In step S21403, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. . After executing Step S21403, the process proceeds to Step S21404.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21401 that the jackpot flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot set in the RAM 64 is not ON (S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21404 as it is.

  In step S21404, the high frequency support mode flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to ON. Specifically, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot flag, and when the determined jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot B and 8R probability variation jackpot B, the high-frequency support mode B flag is turned ON, and the determined jackpot type is 8R. In the case of a probable jackpot A, the high frequency support mode A flag is turned ON. After executing Step S21404, the process proceeds to Step S21405.

  In step S21405, a high frequency support mode command corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Specifically, the high frequency support mode A command or the high frequency support mode B command is set. The set command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 48: step S20703).

  In step S21406, a process of deleting the jackpot flag (turning it OFF) is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21407.

  In step S21407, 100 is set to the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed with the number of games limited. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the power combination support process will be described. The electric utility support processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 48: S20708) of normal processing.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the power combination support process. In step S21501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supporting flag in the various jackpot flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the normal electric accessory 53 is opened, and turned off when the electric accessory 53 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S21501 that the supporting flag is not ON (S21501: NO), the process proceeds to step S21502.

  In step S21502, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various jackpot flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is set to ON when the electrified winning combination lottery for determining whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 53 is to be opened is turned ON, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. Flag. If it is determined in step S21502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S21502: NO), the process proceeds to step S21503.

  In step S21503, it is determined whether or not the value of the electric timer counter Td provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the electric timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the electric timer counter Td is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  In step S21503, when it is determined that the value of the power combination timer counter Td is not “0” (S21503: NO), the main role support processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the electric timer counter Td is “0” (S21503: YES), the process proceeds to step S21504.

  In step S21504, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the symbol variation display in the normal map unit 38 or not. If it is determined in step S21504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S21504: YES), the process proceeds to step S21505, and the out-of-display is set. By setting the out-of-display, the symbol change display in the general-purpose unit 38 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21506, and the electric power processing execution flag is turned off. After executing Step S21506, the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S21504: NO), the process proceeds to step S21507.

  In step S21507, it is determined whether or not the electric utility processing execution flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21507 that the electric power processing execution flag is not ON (S21507: NO), the electric power support processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S21507 that the electric power processing execution flag is ON (S21507: YES), the process proceeds to step S21508.

  In step S21508, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S21509 to determine whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether either the high frequency support mode A flag or the high frequency support mode B flag is ON. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S21508 (S21508: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is in step S21509 (S21509: YES), the process proceeds to step S21510, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 moved to the electric accessory execution area 64e in the through entry process (FIG. 47: S20604) is 0 to 461, the electric accessory is released. The lottery is won (see FIG. 36B). At the same time as the electrification opening lottery, “25” (that is, 0.05 sec) is set to the electric timer counter Td. As described with reference to FIG. 37, in the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B, since the variation time in the electric role opening lottery is 0.05 seconds, the electric timer counter Td is “25” (that is, 0.0). 05sec) is set. The electric timer counter Td is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21511.

  In step S21511, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S21510 is a support winning. In step S21511, when it is determined that the result of the electric-powered object opening lottery is support winning (S21511: YES), the process proceeds to step S21512, and the support winning flag is turned ON. After executing step S21512, the process proceeds to step S21513.

  In step S21513, the setting process of the high frequency support mode electric utility open / close scenario corresponding to the type of the high frequency support mode is executed. This process is a process for setting an opening / closing scenario in which the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is set when the electric accessory opening lottery is won in the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A or high frequency support mode B). It is. Specifically, when the high-frequency support mode A flag is ON, a high-frequency support mode A electric utility switching scenario is set. In the high frequency support mode A electrification opening / closing scenario, when the electrification of opening of the electric power item is won during the high frequency support mode A, the normal electric character 53 is set to be opened once and the normal electric It is set to close the ordinary electric accessory 53 on condition that 3 seconds elapses in the opened state of the accessory 53 or one game ball enters the second starting port 34 (see FIG. 37). ). On the other hand, when the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON, a high-frequency support mode B electric utility open / close scenario is set. In the high-frequency support mode B electric role opening / closing scenario, when the electrification of the electric utility item is won during the high-frequency support mode B, the normal electric feature 53 is set to be opened once, and the normal electric mode is set. It is set that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed on condition that 6 seconds elapses in the opened state of the accessory 53 or one game ball enters the second starting port 34 (see FIG. 37). ). After executing step S21513, the electric power support process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21508 that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode (S21508: YES), or if it is determined in step S21509 that it is not the high frequency support mode (S21509: NO), the process proceeds to step S21514.

  In step S21514, an electric accessory release lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 moved to the electric accessory execution area 64e in the through entry process (FIG. 47: S20604) is 0 or 1, the electric accessory is released. The lottery is won (see FIG. 36A). At the same time as the electrification opening lottery, “5000” (that is, 10.0 sec) is set to the electric timer counter Td. As described with reference to FIG. 37, in the low frequency support mode, since the variation time in the electrification opening lottery is 10 seconds, “5000” (that is, 10.0 sec) is set in the electrification timer counter Td. The electric timer counter Td is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21515.

  In step S21515, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S21514 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S21515 that the support is not won (S21515: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21515 that the support win is selected (S21515: YES), the process proceeds to step S21516, and the support win flag is turned ON. After executing Step S21516, the process proceeds to Step S21517.

  In step S21517, a low frequency support mode electric utility open / close scenario setting process is executed. This process is a process of setting an open / close scenario in which the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is set when the electric accessory release lottery is won in the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode electric role opening / closing scenario, when the electrification opening lottery is won during the low frequency support mode, the normal electric power item 53 is set to be opened once, and the normal electric character is also selected. It is set to close the ordinary electric accessory 53 on condition that 3 seconds elapses in the open state of 53 or one game ball enters the second start port 34 (see FIG. 37). After executing step S21517, the electronic combination support process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21502 that the support winning flag is ON (S21502: YES), the process advances to step S21518 to determine whether or not the value of the electric timer counter Td is “0”. In this case, the electric timer counter Td is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. If it is determined in step S21518 that the value of the electric timer counter Td is not “0” (S21518: NO), since the pattern change display is being performed in the normal unit 38, the main electric character support process is performed as it is. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21518 that the value of the electric timer counter Td is “0” (S21518: YES), the process proceeds to step S21519.

  In step S21519, a win display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern in the general map unit 38 is terminated in a state where the hit display is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21520, where the supporting flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21501 that the supporting flag is ON (S21501: YES), the process advances to step S21521 to execute an electric utility opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory 53. Details of the electric utility opening / closing process will be described later. After executing Step S21521, the process proceeds to Step S21522.

  In step S21522, it is determined whether the electric utility opening / closing process has been completed. If it is determined in step S21522 that the power combination opening / closing process has not ended (S21522: NO), the power combination support process ends. If it is determined in step S21522 that the electric utility opening / closing process has been completed (S21522: YES), the process proceeds to step S21523, and the supporting flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21524, and the electric power processing execution flag is turned off. After executing step S21524, the electric power support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening and closing process>
Next, the electric role opening / closing process will be described. The power combination opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for the power combination support process (FIG. 56: S21521).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the power combination opening / closing process. In step S21601, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open. If it is determined in step S21601 that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is not open (S21601: NO), the process proceeds to step S21602.

  In step S21602, it is determined whether or not the open condition of the set open / close scenario is satisfied. Specifically, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric combination 53 (one time in the present embodiment) in the case of winning one electric combination opening lottery is counted, and the closed state of the ordinary electric combination 53 is maintained. It is determined whether or not a condition for shifting the ordinary electric accessory 53 to the open state is satisfied by counting with a timer counter whether time has passed and the release timing has been reached. If it is determined in step S21602 that the opening / closing scenario opening condition is not satisfied (S21602: NO), the electric utility opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21602 that the opening / closing scenario opening condition is satisfied (S21602: YES), the flow proceeds to step S21603.

  In step S21603, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened. After executing Step S21603, the process proceeds to Step S21604.

  In step S21604, a command release command is set. The electric role release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 48: step S20703) of the normal process. The voice light emitting device that has received the electric role release command executes setting for executing the effect for releasing the electric role. Thereafter, the electric utility opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21601 that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is not open (S21601: YES), the process proceeds to step S21605.

  In step S21605, it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the ordinary electric accessory 53 is satisfied. Specifically, the closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode A is “3 seconds have passed in the open state” or “one game ball is in the open state while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open. One of the “entering the second start opening 34” is established. The closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the high frequency support mode B is “6 seconds have passed in the open state” or “one game ball is in the second start port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open”. One of the “entering the ball” is established. The closing condition of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the low-frequency support mode is “3 seconds have passed in the open state” or “one game ball is placed in the second start port 34 while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is open”. One of the “entering the ball” is established. If it is determined in step S21605 that the closing condition is not satisfied (S21605: NO), the electric utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21605 that the closing condition is satisfied (S21605: YES), the process proceeds to step S21606.

  In step S21606, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed. After executing step S21606, the process proceeds to step S21607.

  In step S21607, a command closing command is set. The electronic role closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the normal command output process (FIG. 48: step S20703). The voice light emitting device that has received the electronic role closing command executes setting for executing the effect for closing the electrical role. Thereafter, the electric utility opening / closing process is terminated.

B5. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. A part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted.

  An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in part of the ROM 93 area.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in part of the RAM 94 area. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 60 and the rendering operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is connected.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control apparatus 100 includes an MPU 102 which is a chip in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the image data.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 106. Further, it is possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, the main side ROM 63, and the main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are respectively referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and the sound light side. The ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

B6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 will be described.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed with a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described.

  In step S21701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling the command received from the main MPU 62 to be stored and read out. The commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step S21701, the process proceeds to step S21702.

  In step S21702, state storage processing is executed. The state storage process is a process of storing the state of the game being executed using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62. The state of the game stored as the flag is used to determine the effect to be executed. Details of the state storage process will be described later. After executing step S21702, the process proceeds to step S21703.

  In step S21703, a support mode effect process is executed. The support mode effect process is a process for setting a background video and audio to be output separately from the effect for each game time according to the type of support mode. Details of the support mode effect processing will be described later. After executing Step S21703, the process proceeds to Step S21704.

  In step S21704, a game round effect process is executed. The game time effect process is a process for setting an effect to be executed for each game time. Details of the game round effect process will be described later. After executing step S21704, the process proceeds to step S21705.

  In step S21705, other display processing is executed. The other display processing is processing for executing various settings related to display based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, a process for updating the number of holds displayed in the hold display area Ds is performed. After executing Step S21705, the process proceeds to Step S21706.

  In step S21706, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the processes in steps S21703 to S21705. That is, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponding to the effect set in Steps S21703 to S21705 is obtained. After executing Step S21706, the process proceeds to Step S21707.

  In step S21707, an audio output control process for performing audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the processes of steps S21703 to S21705. That is, sound output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that sound corresponding to the effect set in step S21703 to step S21705 is output. After executing step S21707, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<State storage process>
Next, the state storage process will be described. The state storage process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 59: S21702).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. The state storage process is a process for storing the state of the game being executed in the sound emission control device 90. The state storage process is mainly composed of three processes. Specifically, steps S21801 to S21804 are processing for storing whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. Steps S21805 to S21808 are processes for storing whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Steps S21809 to S21818 are processes for storing whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode A, the high frequency support mode B, or the low frequency support mode.

  In step S21801, it is determined whether an open / close execution mode end command has been received. The opening / closing execution mode end command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the opening / closing execution mode ends. If it is determined in step S21801 that an open / close execution mode end command has been received (S21801: YES), the flow advances to step S21802 to turn off the open / close execution mode execution flag. The opening / closing execution mode execution flag is a flag for storing whether the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, and is turned ON when execution of the opening / closing execution mode is started, and OFF when the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is a flag to be set. After executing Step S21802, the process proceeds to Step S21803.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21801 that an opening / closing execution mode end command has not been received (S21801: NO), the process proceeds directly to step S21803.

  In step S21803, it is determined whether an open / close execution mode start command has been received. The opening / closing execution mode start command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the opening / closing execution mode is started. If it is determined in step S21803 that an open / close execution mode start command has been received (S21803: YES), the flow proceeds to step S21804, and the open / close execution mode execution flag is set to ON. After executing step S21804, the process proceeds to step S21805.

  If it is determined in step S21803 that the opening / closing execution mode start command has not been received (S21803: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21805.

  In step S21805, it is determined whether a high probability mode command has been received. The high probability mode command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the open / close execution mode ends and the high probability mode is started. If it is determined in step S21805 that a high probability mode command has been received, the process proceeds to step S21806, where the sound light side high probability mode flag is turned ON. The sound side high probability mode flag is a flag for storing whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. After executing Step S21806, the process proceeds to Step S21807.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21805 that the high probability mode command has not been received (S21805: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21807.

  In step S21807, it is determined whether a low probability mode command has been received. The low probability mode command is a command transmitted from the main controller 60 to the sound emission controller 90 when the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S21807 that the low probability mode command has been received, the process advances to step S21808 to turn off the sound light side high probability mode flag. After executing step S21808, the process proceeds to step S21809.

  If it is determined in step S21807 that the low probability mode command has not been received (S21807: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21809.

  In step S21809, it is determined whether a high frequency support mode A command has been received. The high frequency support mode A command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode A. If it is determined in step S21809 that the high-frequency support mode A command has been received (S21809: YES), the process proceeds to step S21810.

  In step S21810, it is determined whether the sound side high frequency support mode B flag is ON. The sound-side high frequency support mode B flag is turned on when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode B, and is turned off when the high frequency support mode B shifts to another support mode. . If it is determined in step S21810 that the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S21810: YES), the process proceeds to step S21811 and the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21812.

  If it is determined in step S21810 that the sound-side high frequency support mode B flag is not ON (S21810: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21812.

  In step S21812, the sound side high frequency support mode A flag is turned ON. The sound-side high frequency support mode A flag is turned on when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode A, and is turned off when the high frequency support mode A shifts to another support mode. . After executing Step S21812, the process proceeds to Step S21813.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21809 that the high-frequency support mode A command has not been received (S21809: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21813.

  In step S21813, it is determined whether a high frequency support mode B command has been received. The high frequency support mode B command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode B. If it is determined in step S21813 that the high-frequency support mode B command has been received (S21813: YES), the process proceeds to step S21814.

  In step S21814, it is determined whether the sound side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21814 that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is ON (S21814: YES), the process proceeds to step S21815, and the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21816.

  If it is determined in step S21814 that the sound-side high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (S21814: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21816.

  In step S21816, the sound side high frequency support mode B flag is turned ON. After executing Step S21816, the process proceeds to Step S21817.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21813 that the high-frequency support mode B command has not been received (S21813: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21817.

  In step S21817, it is determined whether a low frequency support mode command has been received. The low frequency support mode command is a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S21817 that the low-frequency support mode command has been received (S21817: YES), the process proceeds to step S21818.

  In step S21818, the ON flag of the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the state storage process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21817 that the low frequency support mode command has not been received (S21817: NO), the state storage process is terminated.

<Support mode production process>
Next, the support mode effect process will be described. The support mode effect process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interruption process (FIG. 59: S21703).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the support mode effect process. In step S21901, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode execution flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21901 that the open / close execution mode execution flag is not ON (S21901: NO), the process proceeds to step S21902. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21901 that the open / close execution mode execution flag is ON (S21901: YES), the support mode effect processing is terminated.

  In step S21902, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21902 that neither the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag nor the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S21902: NO), the process proceeds to step S21903.

  In step S21903, an effect pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode is executed. Specifically, in the state of the low frequency support mode, the video and the sound for urging the player to enter the game ball into the sorting mechanism 120 by left-handed are separated from the effect for each game time (game time effect). This is a process for setting the contents to be output as the background video and the background music as a production pattern in order to output the background video and the background music. After executing step S21903, the support mode effect processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21902 that the sound side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S21902: YES), the process proceeds to step S21904.

  In step S21904, it is determined whether or not the sound side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21904 that the sound side high frequency support mode A flag is ON (S21904: YES), the process proceeds to step S21905.

  In step S21905, an effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A is executed. Specifically, in the state of the high-frequency support mode A, a video or sound that prompts the player to make a left turn and have the game ball enter the sorting mechanism 120 is displayed for each game time (game time effect). This is a process for setting the contents to be output as the background video and background music as a production pattern in order to output as background video and background music. In the high-frequency support mode A state, compared to the low-frequency support mode state, the percentage of game balls entering the second start opening 34 is high, and a more advantageous privilege can be given when winning the jackpot Therefore, the effect for the high-frequency support mode A is an effect of content that further gives the player a sense of expectation compared to the effect for the low-frequency support mode. After executing step S21905, the support mode effect processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21904 that the sound-side high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (S21904: NO), the process proceeds to step S21906.

  In step S21906, an effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode B is executed. Specifically, in the state of the high-frequency support mode B, a video or sound that prompts the player to make a right turn and allow the game ball to pass through the through gate 35b is provided for each game time (game time effect). In addition, in order to output as background video and background music, the content to be output as background video and background music is set as a production pattern. In the state of the high frequency support mode B, compared to the state of the high frequency support mode A, the ratio of the game balls entering the second start opening 34 is high, and a more advantageous privilege is given when winning the jackpot Since there is a possibility, the effect for the high frequency support mode B is an effect of content that further gives the player a sense of expectation compared to the effect for the high frequency support mode A. After executing step S21906, the support mode effect processing is terminated.

<Game play production process>
Next, the game round effect process will be described. The game round effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 59: S21704).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the game times effect processing. In step S22001, it is determined whether a change command is received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S22001 that a change command has been received (S22001: YES), the process proceeds to step S22002.

  In step S22002, the variation command received this time is read out, and information on the presence / absence of jackpot, type of jackpot, presence / absence of reach, and variation time is read from the command. The read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22003.

  In step S22003, an effect pattern setting process is executed. This process is a process of setting a production pattern in the game times to be processed. Details of the effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing Step S22003, the process proceeds to Step S22004.

  In step S22004, the process for setting the liquid crystal symbols to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the winning result of the current game round is a big hit, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the active line L1 is displayed. Set as design information. In addition, when the result of the lottery for the current game round is out of play, the presence or absence of reach is determined from the contents of the change command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L1, and corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established on the effective line L1. Information is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L1, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is not established on the effective line L1. Corresponding information is set as information on the current liquid crystal design. After executing Step S22004, the process proceeds to Step S22005.

  In step S22005, a game times effect command is transmitted to display control device 100. The game times effect command is information including the effect pattern set in step S22003 and the content of the liquid crystal symbol to be stopped set in step S22004. The display control device 100 that has received the game round effect command causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display an image for production or an image of a liquid crystal pattern based on information included in the game round command. After executing Step S22005, the process proceeds to Step S22006.

  In step S22006, a hold information update process is executed. In the hold information update process, the information in the hold number counter area is updated so that the hold number stored in the hold number counter area of the sound side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S22008, the game turn effect processing is terminated.

<Direction pattern setting processing>
Next, an effect pattern setting process will be described. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the game time effect process (FIG. 62: S22003).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an effect pattern setting process. In step S2211, it is determined whether or not the game time, which is the target for setting the effect, has won a big win in the winning lottery. Specifically, the determination is made based on the information regarding the presence or absence of the jackpot included in the received variation command. If it is determined in step S22101 that the game time to be processed is a big win in the winning lottery (S22101: YES), the process proceeds to step S22102.

  In step S22102, it is determined whether or not the game time, which is the target for which the effect is set, is won in the winning lottery. If it is determined in step S22102 that the winning jackpot has been won (S22102: YES), the process proceeds to step S22103.

  In step S22103, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is jackpot B. If it is determined in step S22103 that the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is jackpot B (S22103: YES), the process proceeds to step S22104.

  In step S22104, an effect pattern setting process for probability variation big hit B is executed. When the probability variation jackpot B is won, the game times to be executed from the next time are the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. Therefore, since the probability variation jackpot B is a jackpot that is very advantageous for the player, the production pattern for the probability variation jackpot B is set to a content that gives a great expectation to the player. After executing step S22104, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22103 that the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is not jackpot B (S22103: NO), the process proceeds to step S22105.

  In step S22105, an effect pattern setting process for probability variation big hit A is executed. After executing step S22105, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22102 that the probability variation jackpot is not won (S22102: NO), the process proceeds to step S22106. In step S22106, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is jackpot B. If it is determined in step S22106 that the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is jackpot B (S22106: YES), the process proceeds to step S22107.

  In step S22107, a normal big hit B effect pattern setting process is executed. After executing step S22107, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22106 that the jackpot type of the game times won for the processing target jackpot is not jackpot B (S22106: NO), the process proceeds to step S22108.

  In step S22108, an effect pattern setting process for a normal jackpot A is executed. After executing step S22108, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22101 that the game time to be processed has not been won in the winning lottery (S22101: NO), the process proceeds to step S22109.

  In step S22109, an effect pattern setting process for removal is executed. After executing step S22109, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the main process is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S22201, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the process of clearing the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. The compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22202.

  In step S22202, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process thereafter executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. In step S22301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified. Execute the display instruction.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction for the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image accompanying the new drawing instruction from being developed in the frame buffer area in which the image information therein is stored. Hereinafter, details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S22401, command response processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 65) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, image drawing and display control are started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the presentation operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24. If it is determined that it is the reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24, the presentation operation is performed. Image rendering and display control are started so that an effect mode corresponding to pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period for accepting the pressing of the presentation operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S22401), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt process is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the aspect of the effect such as the notice effect or the liquid crystal design set by the sound emission control device 90, and the effect image corresponding to the aspect is displayed. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41.

  In step S22402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command handling process (S22401) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22403.

  In step S22403, task processing is executed. In the task processing, the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S22402). In addition to specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22404.

  In step S22404, a drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S22403) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22405, and after performing other processes, the V interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, although the game balls that have entered the opening 122 by the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2, Since the distributed game balls enter the first starting port 33a and the first starting port 33b, the same symbol (first symbol) is changed. Unexpectedness can be imparted to a player who has assumed that different symbols fluctuate for each incoming ball part (starting port). In addition, it is possible to cause the player to make various assumptions about the role (installation purpose) of the distribution mechanism 120 that guides the ball entering part (starting port) that changes the same design despite being distributed to the two routes. it can.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes the ordinary electric accessory 53 on the path through which the game ball flows from the right flow path R2 to the first start port 33b. Regardless of whether the game ball is distributed to any of R2, the game ball distributed to any of the right flow channel R2 is a normal electric accessory when the game ball allocated to either triggers the same symbol (first symbol) 53 may be a trigger to change the second symbol, even if the same circulation mode that causes the game ball to reach the distribution mechanism 120, the first symbol and the second symbol vary depending on the type of support mode The ratio to make can be made into a different aspect. That is, by controlling the winning probability of the electrification opening lottery that determines whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 53 is to be opened, it is possible to make the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol different. .

  More specifically, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can be considered as a distribution mechanism that distributes the game balls that have flowed out of the opening 124 to the first start port 33b and the second start port 34. It can be considered that the machine 10 includes two distribution mechanisms, that is, a distribution mechanism 120 and a normal electric accessory 53. And since the probability that the normal electric accessory 53 functioning as a distribution mechanism will operate is the winning probability of the electric combination opening lottery, it can be changed by changing the support mode. Therefore, even when the distribution mechanism 120 alternately distributes the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 into the left channel R1 and the right channel R2, the ordinary electric accessory 53 that functions as a distribution mechanism. Changes the first symbol and the second symbol by changing the probability of distributing the game ball distributed to the right flow path R2 to the second start port 34 (that is, the winning probability of the electrification opening lottery). The ratio can be changed. For example, when the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 53 distributes the game ball to the second start port 34 (the winning probability of the electric role opening lottery) is set low (in the low frequency support mode), the distribution mechanism 120 will change the left side. The game balls distributed to the flow path R1 are made to enter the first start port 33a, and the first symbol is changed. Since the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 have a low winning probability of the electric role opening lottery, they can enter the first start port 33b with a high probability and change the first symbol. That is, a game ball that has reached the sorting mechanism 120 is made to enter the first start port 33 (the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b) with a high probability, and the first symbol is changed with a high probability (frequency). Can be made.

  On the other hand, when the probability that the ordinary electric accessory 53 distributes the game ball to the second start port 34 (the winning probability of the electric role opening lottery) is set high (in the case of the high frequency support mode A), the distribution mechanism 120 The game balls distributed to the left channel R1 are made to enter the first start port 33a, and the first symbol is changed. Since the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 have a high winning probability of the electric role opening lottery, they can enter the second start opening 34 with a high probability and change the second symbol. In this way, by changing the winning probability of the electrification opening lottery, the changing ratio of the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed even if the distribution mode of the game balls is the same.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a through gate 35b as a through gate serving as an opportunity to execute the electric role opening lottery, in addition to the through gate 35a disposed inside the sorting mechanism 120. Even in the distribution mode of game balls that do not go through 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can be opened. As a result, in the state of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball can be made to enter the second start port 34 with a high probability by circulating the game ball in a distribution mode passing through the through gate 35b.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can realize the following. When the game ball is distributed so that the player reaches the sorting mechanism 120 in the low frequency support mode, the game ball enters the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b, and the second start port Since the possibility that a game ball enters the ball 34 is low, only the first symbol can be changed with a high probability. In the high frequency support mode A, when the player distributes the game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, the game balls are likely to enter the first start port 33a and the second start port 34. Therefore, the first symbol and the second symbol can be varied. In the high-frequency support mode B, when the player circulates the game ball so as to pass through the through gate 35b, there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter only the second start port 34. Only 2 symbols can be varied. As a result, at least three gaming states in which only the first symbol fluctuates with a high probability, gaming states in which the first symbol and the second symbol fluctuate, and gaming states in which only the second symbol fluctuates with a high probability A state can be created.

  In other words, when the game balls are distributed in a distribution manner that is most advantageous for the player, the game balls to the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) per unit time are distributed. The relative ratio between the number of balls entered and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 can be controlled to be changeable in at least three stages. Therefore, by combining the three-stage incoming relative ratio (game state), it is possible to create a variety of new game flows and improve the interest of the game.

  In other words, when the pachinko machine 10 circulates the game balls in a distribution manner that is most advantageous to the player, the pachinko machine 10 determines the probability that the game balls will continuously enter the first start port. The probability that the game ball will alternately enter the first start port and the second start port is the alternate ball probability, and the probability that the game ball will continuously enter the second start port is the second start. In the case of the mouth continuous entry probability, the first starting state consecutive entrance probability is higher than the alternating entrance probability and the second start entrance continuous entrance probability, and the first gaming state (low frequency support mode) and the alternating entrance The second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) in which the ball probability is higher than the first starting port continuous entering probability and the second starting port continuous entering probability, and the second starting port continuous entering probability is the first A third gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is higher than the starting entrance continuous entry probability and alternate entrance probability. And de B), it is possible to be able to control switching of. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 switches between the three gaming states of the first gaming state (low frequency support mode), the second gaming state (high frequency support mode A), and the third gaming state (high frequency support mode B). Since control is possible, by combining the three game states, various new game flows can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (low frequency support mode), and the second gaming state (high frequency support mode A). The third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) is more advantageous for the player than the third gaming state. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 10 controls the three gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player so as to be switchable. Therefore, by switching the gaming state, it is possible to give an inflection to the player's expectation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Although described in the flow of the above game, here, the effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described by comparison with a conventional pachinko machine. When winning a win (including a big win and a small win if a small win is set) in the win lottery executed with the game ball entering the first starting point. The expected value of a privilege (for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out) is set as the first privilege expected value, and a winning win (a jackpot winning win, in a winning lottery executed when a game ball enters the second starting port) In addition, an expected value of a privilege (for example, the number of award balls to be paid out) given when a small-winning winning is set (including a small-winning winning) is set as the second privilege expected value. In addition, the expected value of benefits granted when winning at the normal time is assumed as the expected value at normal times, and the expected value of privileges granted when winning at the time of the high frequency support mode is the expected value of benefits at the time of high support And

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine (hereinafter also referred to as “conventional pachinko machine”) provided with a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls to a first start port and a second start port. In the conventional normal state (for example, the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode) when the game is started, the conventional pachinko machine distributes the game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism, and the first start port and the second start. A game ball is alternately placed in the mouth. When the mode is shifted to the high-frequency support mode, the auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory) operates at a high frequency, so that the game ball enters the second starting port with high probability without using the distribution means. Let

  In the conventional pachinko machine, when the bonus expectation value at the time of high support is higher than the bonus expectation value at the normal time and an attempt is made to increase the difference, it is inevitably necessary to increase the bonus expectation value at the time of high support. The bonus expectation value needs to be increased, but if the second privilege expectation value is increased, the bonus expectation value at the normal time will also increase (in a normal state, a game ball enters the first start port and the second start port) Because a lottery is performed by hitting a ball). Even if the first privilege expectation value is reduced, the normal benefit expectation value is an average of the first benefit expectation value and the second benefit expectation value, so the effect of reducing the first benefit expectation value is It gets smaller.

  In addition, when there are restrictions on the amount of benefits that can be granted per unit time, if the expected benefit value during normal times is relatively large, the expected benefit value at high support is required to adjust within the scope of the regulation. Need to be small. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, it is difficult to set a large difference between the normal benefit expectation value and the high support benefit expectation value. In other words, among the game states excluding the opening / closing execution mode, it is not possible to provide a large swing in the profits obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state. As a result, the player's expectation is increased when the normal state (the normal gaming state, the state with the smallest benefit expectation value) is changed to the high-frequency support mode (the best gaming state, the state with the highest benefit expectation value). It cannot be triggered.

  On the other hand, in the normal state, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment circulates the game balls so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, but since the game balls enter only the first start port 33a with high probability, By setting the first benefit expectation value low, the normal benefit expectation value can be lowered. Furthermore, in the case of the high frequency support mode B, since the game ball enters the second start port 34 with a high probability when the player hits the right hand, the second benefit expectation value should be set high. By this, the expected value at the time of high support in the high frequency support B can be increased. In other words, among the gaming states excluding the opening / closing execution mode, a large swing can be provided in the profit that the player can obtain between the normal gaming state and the best gaming state. Furthermore, in the case of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls are circulated so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, and the game balls are alternately entered into the first start port 33a and the second start port 34. Expected value for bonuses during high support (high frequency support mode A) is an intermediate value between the expected bonus value during normal times and the expected bonus value during high support (in high frequency support mode B), normal state → high frequency support When the game progresses in the flow of the game such as mode A → high frequency support mode B, the value of the expected benefit value to be given is gradually increased, and the game state except for the opening / closing execution mode is normal. It is possible to provide a large range in the profits obtained by the player between the gaming state and the best gaming state.

  Furthermore, when there is a restriction on the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time, the size of the privilege that can be granted per unit time as a whole is set by setting the first privilege expected value low. It is possible to adjust, and it is possible to maintain a state in which the difference between the first privilege expected value and the second privilege expected value is increased. In other words, out of the game state excluding the opening / closing execution mode, it can be granted per unit time while ensuring a large swing in the difference in profits obtained by the player between the normal game state and the best game state It becomes easy to adjust the size of a special privilege within the range of regulation.

  In addition, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the effects exerted by the characteristics are compared with a pachinko machine (conventional pachinko machine) provided with a distribution mechanism that distributes game balls to the first start port and the second start port. As described above, the effect is not only effective for the conventional pachinko machines exemplified above, but for a pachinko machine having two or more entrance parts that trigger different types of lotteries. And has the effect.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the through gate 35a that triggers the passing of the game ball to execute the electric role opening lottery is arranged on one path (the right channel R2) distributed by the distribution mechanism 120. As a result, the player can pay attention to the aspect in which the distribution mechanism 120 distributes the game balls (the order in which the game balls are distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2) and can give a sense of expectation. Furthermore, when it is distributed to the right channel R2, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not to win the electric role opening lottery. Therefore, giving a sense of expectation of at least two stages of the game ball distribution mode in the distribution mechanism 120 and the lottery result in the electric role release lottery (that is, whether or not the ordinary electric accessory 53 is released). Can do.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as the support mode, the low-frequency support mode, and the winning probability of the electric role opening lottery is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode. The electrification opening lottery win probability is higher than that of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode A in which the opening time of the electric accessory 53 is the same as the low frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode B can be executed with a short open time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53 is long, and the switching of these three support modes is used as described in the above game flow. In addition, various new game flows can be created.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has the following effects.
First, it is defined as follows.
-The lottery time (normal symbol fluctuation time) of the electric role opening lottery in the high frequency support mode A is Tp, and when the electric power opening lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 53 will play the game ball from the time when the fluctuation time ends. Ordinary time when winning time is reached Tm (time until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball is in a state where it can circulate on the upper surface) until winning the assisting state. The opening time of the electric accessory 53 is Ts1, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a until it reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is Tr1, and the game ball passes through the through gate 35a and becomes the normal electric accessory 53. Tf1 is the time from the point at which the ball reaches the second starting port 34 by the ordinary electric accessory 53 released from the point of time at which the ball is opened.
-The lottery time (normal symbol fluctuation time) of the electric role opening lottery in the high frequency support mode B is Tp, and when the electric character opening lottery is won, the normal electric accessory 53 will play the game ball from the time when the fluctuation time is over. Ordinary time when winning time is reached Tm (time until the movable piece 53a starts to protrude and the game ball is in a state where it can circulate on the upper surface) until winning the assisting state. The opening time of the electric accessory 53 is Ts2, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 35b until it reaches the normal electric accessory 53 is Tr2, and the game ball passes through the through gate 35b and becomes the normal electric accessory 53. Tf2 is the time from the point at which the ball reaches the second starting port 34 by the ordinary electric accessory 53 released from the point of time reached.
When defined in this way, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured to satisfy the following formulas (1) to (3).
Tp + Tm ≦ Tr1 ... Formula (1)
Tp + Tm ≦ Tr2 ... Formula (2)
Tr1 + Tf1 ≦ Tp + Tm + Ts1 <Tr2 + Tf2 ≦ Tp + Tm + Ts2 (3)
In this embodiment, the specific values of the above parameters are Tp = 0.05 seconds, Tm = 0.1 seconds, Tr1 = 0.3 seconds, Tr2 = 0.3 seconds, Tf1 = 2. 0.0 seconds, Tf2 = 5.0 seconds, Ts1 = 3.0 seconds, and Ts2 = 6.0 seconds, which satisfy the above expressions (1) to (3).

In such a configuration, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode A, when the game ball is circulated (left-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35a, guidance by the ordinary electric accessory 53 ( Auxiliary) allows the game ball to enter the second start port 34. However, when the game ball is circulated (right-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35b, the game ball is moved to the second start port 34. Since the ordinary electric accessory 53 closes before entering the ball, the game ball cannot enter the second start port 34.
Therefore, in consideration of a distribution mode of game balls advantageous to the player, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode A, the game passes through the through gate 35a (so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120). The distribution mode in which the ball is distributed (left-handed) is a game ball distribution mode that is more advantageous to the player than the distribution mode (right-handed) in which the game ball is distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35b.

  On the other hand, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode B, when the game ball is circulated through the through gate 35a and when the game ball is circulated through the through gate 35b. In any case, the game ball can be made to enter the second starting port 34 by the guidance (assistance) by the ordinary electric accessory 53. However, when the game balls are circulated so as to pass through the through gate 35a, the game balls pass through the distribution mechanism 120, and therefore, the games distributed to the right channel R2 among the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120. Only a sphere can pass through the through gate 35a. Therefore, when the game ball is circulated (left-handed) so as to reach the distribution mechanism 120, it passes through the through gate 35a corresponding to the number of game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 and enters the second start port 34. The ratio of the number of game balls to be played is the second through the through gate 35b with respect to the number of game balls reaching the through gate 35b when the game ball is distributed (right-handed) so as to pass through the through gate 35b. It becomes lower than the ratio of the number of game balls entering the start port 34. Therefore, when considering the distribution mode of game balls advantageous to the player, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode B, the distribution mode (right-handed) of distributing the game balls through the through gate 35b. This is a game ball distribution mode that is more advantageous to the player than the distribution mode (left-handed) in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the through gate 35a (so as to reach the sorting mechanism 120).

  Here, the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B differ only in the opening time of the ordinary electric combination 53 when winning in one electric combination opening lottery as control during the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a game advantageous to the player only by switching between the two high-frequency support modes with different opening times of the ordinary electric utility item 53 in the case of winning one electric role opening lottery. The distribution mode of the sphere can be changed. Therefore, new game characteristics can be created, and further, the player can be actively participated in the change operation of the distribution mode of the game balls, and the interest of the game can be improved.

B7. Modification of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are possible. In the modification described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effects as those in the above embodiment is omitted.

B7-1. Modification 1:
In the second embodiment, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34 is disposed above the first starting port 33b, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is used in the high frequency support mode B. While the game ball is being guided to the second start opening 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball is discharged from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down to enter the first start opening 33b. There is a problem of spheres. Modification 1 shown below solves the above problem.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port in the first modification. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in the first modification. In FIG. 67, the ordinary electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an opened state when represented by a solid line.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the second start port 34 in this example is arranged on the right side when viewed from the front of the game board 30 with respect to the first start port 33b. Further, the ordinary electric accessory 53 includes a left movable piece 53d and a right movable piece 53e which are two movable pieces. The left movable piece 53d is disposed on the distribution path of the game ball from the opening 124 to the first start port 33b. The left movable piece 53d is inclined so that the right part is positioned below the left part. The right movable piece 53e is disposed on the distribution path of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b. The right movable piece 53e is inclined so that the left part is positioned below the right part.

  The contents of the control such as the other configuration and the winning probability of the electrification opening lottery in each support mode, the variation time in the electrification opening lottery, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 53, and the like are the same as in the above embodiment. Each support mode when such a configuration is adopted will be described below.

  In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to be left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. During execution of the low frequency support mode, as in the above embodiment, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2, and the left flow The game balls swung on the path R1 enter the first start port 33a (FIG. 67 (a)), and the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 enter the first start port 33b (FIG. 67). (B)).

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode A in the first modification. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. During execution of the high-frequency support mode A, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed alternately to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2, as in the above embodiment. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), the game ball swung to the left channel R1 enters the first start port 33a. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 are guided (assisted) to the left movable piece 53d of the open ordinary electric accessory 53 with a high probability to be the second starting port. Enter 34. In the present modification, even if the player hits the right during the execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Prior to reaching, the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state, so that the game ball does not enter the second start port 34.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode B in the first modification. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to make a right turn and pass through the through gate 35b. During execution of the high frequency support mode B, as in the above embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53e of the open ordinary electric accessory 53 with a high probability. To enter the second starting port 34.

  At this time, unlike the second embodiment, the portion (the right movable piece 53e) of the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B is the first starting port 33b. Therefore, the game ball guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 (the right movable piece 53e) in the high-frequency support mode B does not pass through the upper part of the first start port 33b. 34 can be reached. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed while the ordinary electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball discharged from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down. Can be prevented from entering the first start port 33b. Accordingly, when the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 is considered during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a modified example 1 can further increase the ratio of the game balls entering the second start opening 34 as compared to the above embodiment.

B7-2. Modification 2:
In the second embodiment, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34 is arranged above the first starting port 33b, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is used in the high frequency support mode A. While the game ball is guided to the second start opening 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down is the first start opening. There is a problem of entering the ball 33b.

  Similarly, in the high frequency support mode B, while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second start port 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball is There is a problem that the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down enters the first start port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above problem.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port in the second modification. FIG. 70 is also an explanatory diagram illustrating the low frequency support mode in the second modification.

  The difference between the second modification and the first modification is that the second modification does not include the first start port 33b included in the first modification. Other configurations are the same as those of the first modification.

  70 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low frequency support mode in the second modification, FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high frequency support mode A in the second modification, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the frequency support mode B. FIG.

  In the case of the modified example 2, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the high frequency support mode A, the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 by the distribution mechanism 120 are guided by the left movable piece 53d for the second start. Enter the mouth 34. At this time, unlike the configuration of the first modification, the second modification does not include the first start opening 33b, so that the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed at an unintended timing while guiding the game ball to the second start opening 34, Even when the game ball is released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flows down, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first start port 33b. In the present modification, even if the player hits the right during the execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Prior to reaching, the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state, so that the game ball does not enter the second start port 34.

  Further, unlike the second embodiment, the first starting port 33b is not provided, and therefore, the portion of the ordinary electric accessory 53 (right movable) that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during execution of the high frequency support mode B. The piece 53e) is not positioned above the first start port 33b, and the game ball guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 (the right movable piece 53e) in the high-frequency support mode B is The second starting port 34 can be reached without passing through the upper part. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed while the ordinary electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball discharged from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting port 33b. Accordingly, when the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 is considered during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a modified example 2 can further increase the ratio of the game balls entering the second start port 34 as compared to the second embodiment.

B7-3. Modification 3:
In the second embodiment, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34 is arranged above the first starting port 33b, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is used in the high frequency support mode A. While the game ball is guided to the second start opening 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down is the first start opening. There is a problem of entering the ball 33b.

  Similarly, in the high frequency support mode B, while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second start port 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball is There is a problem that the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down enters the first start port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above problem.

  Further, in the first and second modifications, the ordinary electric accessory 53 has two parts, that is, the left movable piece 53d and the right movable piece 53e. Therefore, the ordinary electric combination is applied to the game area PA of the game board 30. There is a problem that a large (large) space for arranging the objects 53 must be secured. Modification 3 shown below solves the above problem.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port in the third modification. FIG. 73 is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in the third modification.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification does not include the first start port 33b as in the second modification. In addition, the second start port 34 is disposed on a distribution path through which the game ball released from the opening 124 flows down. Furthermore, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is disposed on the distribution path of the game ball from the opening 124 to the second start port 34. The operation of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in this modification is different from that in the above embodiment. The ordinary electric accessory 53 in the modified example 3 is opened and closed when the movable piece 53 a arranged so as to protrude from the game board 30 moves on the plane of the game board 30. FIG. 73 shows a state of the low frequency support mode, and the ordinary electric accessory 53 shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b) is in a closed state.

  In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to be left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b), during execution of the low frequency support mode, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120 are left channel R1 and right channel R2. And the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 enter the first start port 33a, and the game balls allocated to the right channel R2 flow out of the opening 124 and then close. The upper surface of the movable piece 53 a of the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the state flows down, and does not enter the second start port 34 and further flows downward from the ordinary electric accessory 53.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode A in the third modification. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. During execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. FIG. 74 (a) shows a state in which the game ball swung to the left channel R1 enters the first start port 33a. FIG. 74 (b) shows a state in which the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 enter the second start port 34. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), the ordinary electric accessory 53 in this example shifts from the closed state to the open state by moving in the upper right direction when the game board 30 is viewed from the front. When the ordinary electric accessory 53 moves in the upper right direction, the game ball can be distributed from the opening 124 to the second start port 34, and the game ball enters the second start port 34. In addition, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the above embodiment and the modification guides the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the ordinary electric accessory 53 to the second start port 34, the game ball enters the second start port 34. Although functioning as an auxiliary means for assisting the ball, the ordinary electric accessory 53 in this example also makes it easy for the game ball released from the opening 124 to enter the second start port 34 by shifting to the open state. Therefore, it functions as an auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the second start port 34.

  Further, in the present modification, even if the player hits the right during the execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Prior to reaching, the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state, so that the game ball does not enter the second start port 34.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode B in the third modification. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to make a right turn and pass through the through gate 35b. As shown in the drawing, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b reaches the upper surface of the wall portion W of the game board 30 and flows through the upper surface of the wall portion W. And enters the second starting port 34.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 3 does not include the first start port 33b as in the modified example 2. Therefore, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened at an unintended timing in the state of the high frequency support mode A. Even in the case of shifting from the closed state to the game ball, it is possible to avoid the game ball from entering the first start port 33b.

  Further, since the first start port 33b is not provided, the normal electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second start port 34 during execution of the high-frequency support mode B may be located above the first start port 33b. In the high frequency support mode B, the game ball guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 can reach the second start port 34 without passing through the upper portion of the first start port 33b. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed while the ordinary electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball discharged from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting port 33b. Accordingly, when the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 is considered during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a modified example 3 can further increase the ratio of the game balls entering the second start port 34 as compared to the second embodiment.

  Furthermore, unlike the first and second modifications, the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the third modification is not provided with two parts such as the left movable piece 53d and the right movable piece 53e, and is configured by one movable piece. . Accordingly, the space for arranging the ordinary electric accessory 53 relative to the game area PA of the game board 30 can be narrowed (smaller), and space saving of the arrangement area for the ordinary electric accessory 53 can be realized.

  Further, the ordinary electric accessory 53 in the modified example 3 shields the flow path from the right flow path R2 to the second start port 34 and flows from the wall portion W to the second start port 34 when in the closed state. Divide the route. In the open state, the shielding of the flow path from the right flow path R2 to the second start port 34 is released, and a flow path from the wall W to the second start port 34 is formed. Therefore, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can change the two distribution paths by shifting from the closed state to the open state. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 53 can simultaneously change the states of the two kinds of distribution channels by one state change. As a result, either when the game ball is circulated through the distribution path from the right channel R2 to the second start port 34 or when the game ball is circulated through the distribution path from the wall W to the second start port 34, either Even in this case, it is possible to execute a game using the ordinary electric accessory 53.

B7-4. Modification 4:
In the second embodiment, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34 is arranged above the first starting port 33b, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is used in the high frequency support mode A. While the game ball is guided to the second start opening 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down is the first start opening. There is a problem of entering the ball 33b.

  Similarly, in the high frequency support mode B, while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second start port 34, the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed at an unintended timing, and the game ball is There is a problem that the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down enters the first start port 33b. Modification 2 shown below solves the above problem.

  In the configurations of Modification 2 and Modification 3, the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 and released from the opening 124 in the low frequency support mode enter the first start opening 33 and the second start opening 34. It was the composition that flows down as it is without a ball. As a result, there is a problem in that the ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out is not dependent on the action of the actors in the total number of prize balls to be paid out in a series of games. Modification 4 shown below solves the above problem.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port according to the fourth modification. FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in the second modification.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth modified example, the general winning opening 32 is arranged on the distribution path through which the game balls released from the opening 124 flow down. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 4 does not include the first start port 33b.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the game balls that enter the opening 122 in the low frequency support mode and are distributed to the left channel R1 by the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first start port 33a. Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the game balls distributed to the right channel R 2 enter the general winning opening 32. In the configurations of Modification 2 and Modification 3, the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 and released from the opening 124 in the low-frequency support mode are allowed to enter the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. However, in this modification, the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 and released from the opening 124 in the low frequency support mode enter the general winning opening 32. Therefore, as compared with the second modification and the third modification, it is possible to increase the ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out without depending on the action of the accessory in the total number of prize balls to be paid out in a series of games.

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode A in the fourth modification. As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the high frequency support mode A, the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 by the distribution mechanism 120 enter the first start port 33a. Then, the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 enter the second start port 34. In the configuration of the modification example 4, even if the left side movable piece 53d is guiding the game ball to the second start port 34 and the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed, the game ball is placed in the general winning port 32. It is possible to avoid entering the ball and unintentionally entering the first start port 33b. In the present modification, even if the player hits the right during the execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Prior to reaching, the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state, so that the game ball does not enter the second start port 34.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode B in the fourth modification. As shown in FIG. 78, in the case of the high-frequency support mode B, as in the first modification, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b can move to the right side of the open ordinary electric accessory 53 with a high probability. The ball is guided (assisted) by the piece 53e and enters the second starting port 34. Unlike the second embodiment, the configuration of the modified example 4 does not include the first start port 33b. Therefore, the ordinary electric accessory that guides the game ball to the second start port 34 during the execution of the high-frequency support mode B. The game ball guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 (the right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B without the portion 53 (the right movable piece 53e) being positioned above the first start port 33b is The second start port 34 can be reached without passing through the upper portion of the first start port 33b. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed while the ordinary electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball discharged from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting port 33b. Accordingly, when the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 is considered during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a modified example 2 can further increase the ratio of the game balls entering the second start port 34 as compared to the second embodiment.

B7-5. Modification 5:
In the second embodiment, since the first start port 33 includes the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b, the first start port 33 detects the entrance of a game ball. It is necessary to carry out at the two entrances of the first start opening 33a and the first start opening 33b, and there is a problem that more sensors for detecting the entrance of the game ball must be provided than before, and the game area PA of the game board 30 On the other hand, there is a problem that a space for arranging the start port must be secured larger (larger) than before. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, since the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B is disposed above the first starting port 33b, In the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball guided (assisted) by the ordinary electric accessory 53 passes through the upper part of the first start port 33b and reaches the second start port 34. At this time, if the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed while the ordinary electric accessory 53 is guiding the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball released from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down is There is a problem that the ball enters the first start port 33b unintentionally. Modification 5 shown below solves the above problem.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 5. FIG. 79 is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the low frequency support mode in the fifth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in the distribution mechanism 120 according to Modification 5, the left channel R1 has a semicircular shape. Also, the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 and released from the opening 123 and the game balls distributed to the right channel R2 and released from the opening 124 are first placed at a position where any game ball can enter. A start port 33a is arranged. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 5 does not include the first start port 33b.

  In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to be left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), during execution of the low frequency support mode, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the sorting mechanism 120 are left channel R1 and right channel R2. And the game balls distributed to the left channel R1 enter the first start port 33a, and the game balls allocated to the right channel R2 also flow out of the opening 124, 1. Enter the starting port 33a.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode A in the fifth modification. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. During execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game balls that have entered the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120 are alternately distributed to the left channel R1 and the right channel R2. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the game ball swung to the left channel R1 enters the first start port 33a. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 are guided (assisted) to the left movable piece 53d of the open ordinary electric accessory 53 with a high probability to be the second starting port. Enter 34. In the present modification, even if the player hits the right during the execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Prior to reaching, the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state, so that the game ball does not enter the second start port 34.

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode B in the fifth modification. In the high-frequency support mode B in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to make a right turn and pass through the through gate 35b. During the execution of the high frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53e of the opened ordinary electric accessory 53 with a high probability, and is moved to the second start port 34. Enter the ball.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 5 includes only one of the first start ports 33a as the first start port. Therefore, compared to the second embodiment, a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball that must be included. The number of can be reduced. Along with this, it is possible to reduce the processing required for detecting the incoming ball. Furthermore, the space that must be secured in order to arrange the start port with respect to the game area PA of the game board 30 can be made narrower (smaller) than in the second embodiment.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to this modification, the portion (the right movable piece 53e) of the ordinary electric accessory 53 that guides the game ball to the second starting port 34 during the execution of the high frequency support mode B is the first starting port 33. Since it is not arranged above (the first start opening 33a), the game ball guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 (the right movable piece 53e) in the high frequency support mode B is located above the first start opening 33. The second start port 34 can be reached without passing. As a result, even if the ordinary electric accessory 53 is closed while the ordinary electric accessory 53 guides the game ball to the second starting port 34, the game ball discharged from the ordinary electric accessory 53 and flowing down. Can be prevented from entering the first starting port 33. Accordingly, when the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33 and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 is considered during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a modified example 5 can further increase the entrance ratio of the game ball to the second start port 34 as compared with the above embodiment.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modification, the game balls distributed to the left flow path R1 and the game balls distributed to the right flow path R2 are distributed even though the game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism 120. Since both enter the first starting opening 33a which is the same entrance part, it is possible to make the player make various assumptions about the installation purpose of the distribution mechanism 120 and to add unexpectedness.

B7-6. Modification 6:
Since the distribution mechanism 120 in the second embodiment and the modification example alternately distributes the reached game balls into the left channel R1 and the right channel R2, the player can determine whether the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 are There is a problem that it is possible to infer how it is distributed and that the concentration of the player and the degree of attention may be reduced. Modification 6 shown below solves the above problem.

  FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the distribution mechanism 120, the ordinary electric accessory 53, and each starting port in Modification 6. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low-frequency support mode in the sixth modification. In FIG. 82, the ordinary electric accessory 53 indicates a closed state when represented by a broken line, and indicates an opened state when represented by a solid line.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the distribution mechanism 120 in the modification 6 includes a cron 129 for temporarily retaining a game ball that has entered from the opening 122. An opening 123 and an opening 124 are formed in the cron 129. The opening 124 is provided with a through gate 35a.

  The game ball that has entered from the opening 122 is temporarily retained while moving in the area of the croon 129, and then released from the opening 123 or 124. That is, the distribution mechanism 120 in this modification randomly distributes the reached game balls to the opening 123 and the opening 124.

  In the low frequency support mode in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is circulated so as to be left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the game balls distributed to the opening 123 in the croon 129 enter the first start port 33a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the game balls distributed to the opening 124 in the croon 129 pass through the through gate 35a. The electrification opening lottery is executed in response to the passage, but since it is in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lottery is low, and the game balls distributed to the opening 124 have a high probability to the first start port 33b. Enter the ball.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode A in the sixth modification. In the high-frequency support mode A in this example, the player's profit is maximized when the game ball is distributed so as to be left-handed and enter the opening 122 of the distribution mechanism 120. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the game balls distributed to the opening 123 in the croon 129 enter the first start port 33a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the game balls distributed to the opening 124 in the croon 129 pass through the through gate 35a, and an electric role opening lottery is executed in response to the passage. Since it is the high frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the lottery is high, and in this case, the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the open state. Therefore, the game balls distributed to the opening 124 by the croon 129 are guided (assisted) by the ordinary electric accessory 53 and enter the second starting port 34 with high probability. In the present modification, even if the player hits the right during the execution of the high frequency support mode A, the game ball is guided (assisted) by the normal electric accessory 53 in the open state, and the second start port 34 Prior to reaching, the ordinary electric accessory 53 shifts to the closed state, so that the game ball does not enter the second start port 34.

  FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-frequency support mode B in the sixth modification. As shown in FIG. 84, in the high-frequency support mode B, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35b is guided (assisted) to the right movable piece 53e of the open ordinary electric accessory 53 with a high probability. To enter the second starting port 34.

  Thus, the modification 6 differs from the above-described embodiment and the modification in the configuration of the distribution mechanism 120, and includes the cron 129. That is, the game balls that have arrived at the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed randomly rather than being distributed alternately to the two paths. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to guess how the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the distribution mode in the distribution mechanism 120 and to concentrate the player on the game. In particular, in the high-frequency support mode A, the game balls distributed to the opening 123 enter the first start opening 33a, and the game balls distributed to the opening 124 have a high probability with respect to the second start opening 34. Enter the ball. Accordingly, unlike the case where the distribution mechanism 120 alternately distributes the two paths, the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first start port 33a and the number of game balls entering the second start port 34 is determined. Bias may occur. Therefore, in the case of the configuration of the modification example 6, the high frequency support A can give the player a sense of expectation and tightness.

  Further, in this modification, the configuration in which the opening 123 and the opening 124 are formed in the clune 129 is adopted, but the configuration in which three or more openings are formed in the clune 129 is adopted. It may be adopted. For example, in addition to the opening 123 and the opening 124, the croon 129 may include a third opening. And the structure which provides the general winning opening 32 on the distribution route of the game ball discharge | released from the 3rd opening part, or the structure which does not provide a ball-entry part may be employ | adopted. By doing in this way, it becomes more difficult for the player to guess how the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism 120 are distributed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the distribution mode in the distribution mechanism 120.

B7-7. Modification 7:
The pachinko machine 10 in the above embodiment employs a configuration in which the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode when winning a promising jackpot, and the high probability mode continues until the next jackpot is won. You may employ | adopt the structure with a restriction | limiting in the execution number of game times. By adopting such a configuration, for example, even if it becomes the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B when the 16R probability variation jackpot B is won, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode Since there is a limit on the number of game times that can be executed in the state B (for example, 150 times), if the jackpot is not won before the limit number is reached, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are entered. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example 7 is disadvantageous in the case of the high probability mode, in addition to giving the player a sense of expectation for winning the jackpot and not winning the jackpot within the limited number of times. It is possible to give a sense of crisis that the game will shift to a different state, and to give an inflection to the player's expectation.

B7-8. Modification 8:
In the above embodiment, when the jackpot type set to the high frequency support mode A (probable jackpot A, normal jackpot A) among the jackpot types set in the distribution table for the first start port is won, You may employ | adopt the structure which makes a player the aspect which is hard to recognize having won. For example, the player is set in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot has been won in the stage of the game times when the jackpot is won in the high frequency support mode A. Then, the period of the opening / closing execution mode after the end of the game round winning the jackpot is set to a very short time so that the player can hardly recognize that the opening / closing execution mode has been executed. Specifically, the number of round games (number of rounds) set to the jackpot type (probable jackpot A, normal jackpot A) that becomes the high frequency support mode A is reduced (for example, two rounds), and the round game Set the time in a very short time. Further, the effect during the opening / closing execution mode is set to a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize. By adopting such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize that the player has transitioned from the state of the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support A through the big win. As a result, from the state (the low frequency support mode) in which the game balls that have reached the sorting mechanism 120 are alternately entering the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b without the player's awareness. The game ball that has reached the minute mechanism 120 can be shifted to a state (high frequency support mode A) in which the game ball enters the first start port 33a and the second start port 34 alternately, thereby giving the player an unexpectedness. Can improve the interest of the game.

B7-9. Modification 9:
In the pachinko machine 10 of the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the game balls that have passed through the through gates 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b) are not retained, but a configuration in which the game balls that have passed may be retained ( Maximum number of holds is 4). In this way, in the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B, the game ball reaches the ordinary electric accessory 53 through the through gate 35 (through gate 35a, through gate 35b). And the timing at which the ordinary electric accessory 53 is opened are likely to occur, and whether the game ball reaches the second start port 34 by being guided by the ordinary electric accessory 53 at the same timing. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to whether or not, and to give a sense of expectation and tightness.

B7-10. Modification 10:
The ordinary electric accessory 53 is not limited to the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and other configurations can be employed. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 53. As shown in the figure, when the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in the closed state, the game ball circulation surface 53 s of the plate-like movable piece 53 a is tilted so as to be parallel to the plane of the game board 30. When the ordinary electric accessory 53 is in an open state, the distribution surface 53s rotates so as to be substantially perpendicular to the plane of the game board 30, and the game ball can be distributed on the distribution surface 53s. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment and the modification can be obtained.

B7-11. Modification 11:
In the said 2nd Embodiment, it may replace with the ordinary electric accessory 53 and may be provided with a non-electric accessory. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35a or the through gate 35b, the non-electrically-operated object mechanically interlocked with the through gate 35a and the through gate 35b is opened for a predetermined time, It will be closed after elapse. By doing in this way, while being able to simplify a process, there can exist an effect similar to the said 2nd Embodiment.

B7-12. Modification 12:
In the second embodiment, the effects executed in the game times in each gaming state of the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode A, and the high frequency support mode B are determined based on the lottery result corresponding to each game time. However, it is not set reflecting information on the gaming state at the time when the game times are executed. Although each game state has its own characteristics, no effects reflecting each characteristic are set, and there is room to improve the interest of the game through the effects.

  For example, in the high-frequency support mode A, the probability of game balls entering the first start port (the first start port 33a and the first start port 33b) and the second start port 34 alternately (hereinafter referred to as the alternating start ball). Probability (also referred to as probability) is the probability that a game ball will enter the first start port (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) continuously (also referred to as first start port continuous pitch probability), It is higher than the probability that a game ball enters the start port 34 continuously.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 35, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the game times (hereinafter also referred to as the first start port game times) caused by the game ball entering the first start port. It is more advantageous for the player to execute the game times (hereinafter also referred to as second start port game times) caused by the game ball entering the second start port than to execute It is configured. In other words, rather than winning a jackpot in the game times that are executed when triggered by entering the first starting port, those who win a jackpot in the game times executed when entering the second starting port However, there is a high possibility that it will be advantageous to the player. Specifically, when the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the jackpot type (jackpot B) that shifts (or maintains) to the high-frequency support mode B as the jackpot type wins the jackpot at the first start opening game times. It is more likely to win the jackpot at the second start opening game times, and conversely, in most cases even if the jackpot is won at the first start opening game times, the jackpot type will shift to (or maintain) the high frequency support mode A ) Is a jackpot type (jackpot A). In other words, the winning degree of the bonus given by winning the jackpot is higher in the winning of the jackpot in the second starting game game than the winning jackpot in the first opening game game .

  Therefore, among the three gaming states of the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode A, and the high-frequency support mode B, the probability that the first start port game times and the second start port game times are executed alternately is particularly high. In the frequency support mode A, the player's expectation is relatively smaller in the first start opening game times than in the second start opening game times. In addition, in the high frequency support mode A, the player may not want to win a jackpot at the first start opening game times. In such a case, the player has a relatively long period of time at the first start opening game times. , And performing an effect that defeats the player's expectation such as winning or losing the jackpot, the player is uncomfortable. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode A, the first start opening game times where the player's expectation is small are executed in a short time, and the second start opening game times where the player's expectation is large take a relatively long time. It is preferable to execute the program and give the player a sense of expectation, and to reduce or suppress the player's discomfort.

  Therefore, in this modification, in the high frequency support mode A, the average value of the variation time of the first start opening game times is set shorter than the average value of the variation time of the second start opening game times. By doing in this way, in the high frequency support mode A, the first start opening game times where the player's expectation is small are executed in a short time to suppress the decrease in expectation, and the second start opening game times are compared. It can be executed over a long time to improve the player's expectation.

  In addition, in a normal gaming machine, if the lottery result of the winning lottery is out of reach (reaches are generated) or a big win is won, the time for performing the reach production etc. is taken into consideration, and the fluctuation time is longer than the outage (no reach is generated) Is set to be longer. In the second embodiment, three variable time tables corresponding to each of the lottery results for winning (reach non-occurrence), disabling (reach occurrence) and jackpot are prepared, and the variable time table corresponding to the lottery result of the winning lottery is prepared. It is realized by referring.

  However, in the high frequency support mode A in the second embodiment, even if the winning lottery is won in the first start opening game times, the probability of winning the big hit type (big hit B) that shifts to the high frequency support mode B is Since it is low, even if it is recognized that the big win is won by the effect at the first start opening game times, the player's expectation for the game times is small. That is, the player's expectation is small for the first start opening game times executed in the high frequency support mode A regardless of the result of the winning lottery.

  Therefore, in the present modification, when the first start opening game times are executed in the high frequency support mode A, there is no difference in variation time between the case where the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the case where the lottery is off. To do. Specifically, when the first start opening game is executed in the high frequency support mode A, the same variation time table is referred regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Hereinafter, the variation time table that is referred to when the first start opening game times are executed in the high frequency support mode A is also referred to as the first start opening variation time table at the time of high support A. Then, as described above, the average value of the variation time set by referring to the first variation time table for the first start port at the time of high support A is the second start port game times executed in the high frequency support mode A. Information (value) corresponding to the variation time is set in the variation time table for the first start port at the time of high support A so as to be shorter than the average value of the variation time.

  Hereinafter, an example of a specific configuration for realizing this modification will be described. In the present description, differences between the present modification and the second embodiment will be described, and description of the same configurations in the present modification and the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Variation time setting process>
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the change time setting process in the twelfth modification. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 51: S21016) in the second embodiment. That is, in this modification, instead of the change time setting process described in FIG. 52 of the second embodiment, the change time setting process shown in FIG. 86 described below is employed.

  In step S22501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22502.

  In step S22502, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode A flag or the high frequency support mode B flag is ON. If it is determined in step S22502 that neither the high-frequency support mode A flag nor the high-frequency support mode B is ON (S22502: NO), the flow proceeds to step S22503.

  In step S22503, low frequency support mode variable time setting processing is executed. That is, the state in which neither the high-frequency support mode A flag nor the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON is the low-frequency support mode state, so that the variable time setting process corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed. The variation time setting process for the low frequency support mode is a process for setting the variation time of the game times executed in the state of the low frequency support mode. Details of the low frequency support mode variable time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S22503, the process proceeds to Step S22507.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22502 that the high-frequency support mode A flag or the high-frequency support mode B flag is ON (S22502: YES), the process proceeds to step S22504.

  In step S22504, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step S22504 that the high-frequency support mode A flag is ON (S22504: YES), the process proceeds to step S22505.

  In step S22505, a high frequency support mode A variation time setting process is executed. The high-frequency support mode A variable time setting process is a process of setting a variable time of game times executed in the high-frequency support mode A state. Details of the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A will be described later. After executing Step S22505, the process proceeds to Step S22507.

  If it is determined in step S22504 that the high-frequency support mode A flag is not ON (S22504: NO), the process proceeds to step S22506. In step S22506, a high frequency support mode B variable time setting process is executed. The variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode B is a process for setting the variable time of the game times executed in the state of the high frequency support mode B. Details of the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode B will be described later. After executing Step S22506, the process proceeds to Step S22507.

  In step S22507, the obtained variation time information is set in the variation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process for setting the variation time is terminated.

<Variation time setting process for low frequency support mode>
Next, the variable time setting process for the low frequency support mode will be described. The low frequency support mode variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a variable time setting process subroutine (FIG. 86: S22503).

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process for the low frequency support mode. In step S22601, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the lottery for the game times to be processed is a big hit. If it is determined in step S22601 that the lottery result of the winning game process lottery is a big win (S22601: YES), the process proceeds to step S22602.

  In step S22602, with reference to the low-frequency support mode jackpot variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d (denoted as a low support jackpot variation time table in the figure), this variation type counter Get the variation time corresponding to the value of CS. Thereafter, the low frequency support mode variable time setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22601 that the lottery result of the winning game number to be processed is not a big win (S22601: NO), the process proceeds to step S22603.

  In step S22603, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the lottery for the game times to be processed is out of reach (reach occurrence). If it is determined in step S22603 that the lottery result of the winning game number to be processed is out of reach (reach occurrence) (S22603: YES), the process proceeds to step S22604.

  In step S22604, the current fluctuation is referred to by referring to the fluctuation occurrence time table for low frequency support mode reach generation (represented as a fluctuation occurrence table for low support period reach in the figure) stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d. The variation time corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the low frequency support mode variable time setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22603 that the lottery result of the winning game number to be processed is not out of reach (reach occurrence) (S22603: NO), the process proceeds to step S22605. In step S22605, this time with reference to the low frequency support mode reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d (denoted as low support time non-reach reach variable time table in the figure) The fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the low frequency support mode variable time setting process is terminated.

  In this variation, in the low frequency support mode, the variable time is set according to the lottery result of the winning lottery without distinguishing between the first start opening game times and the second start opening game times. Do. By doing in this way, it is not necessary to memorize | store the fluctuation | variation time table for 1st start opening | mouth game times, and the fluctuation | variation time table for 2nd start opening | mouth game times, and can reduce memory capacity. Further, in the low frequency support mode, when setting the variation time, it is possible to omit the process of determining whether it is the first start opening game time or the second start opening game time, and the variation time setting process Can be simplified. Further, in the low frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball enters the second start port 34 is extremely low, and therefore data storage is performed assuming that the second start port game times are executed in the low frequency support mode. Ensuring the capacity or complicating the setting process of the variable time leads to inefficiency in manufacturing. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the first start opening game time and the second start opening game time It is preferable to set the variable time according to the lottery result of the winning lottery without distinguishing between the two.

  Further, in this modification, the average value of the variation time in the case of a big win among the cases where the lottery result of the win lottery is a big win, a case of being out (reach occurrence), or a case of a loss (no reach). Each variation time table so that the average value of the fluctuation time when the deviation is the longest, and then the deviation (reach occurrence) is long, and the average fluctuation time when the deviation (no reach) is the shortest Is structured.

<Variable time setting process for high frequency support mode A>
Next, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode A will be described. The high frequency support mode A variable time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a variable time setting process subroutine (FIG. 87: S22505).

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the high frequency support mode A variation time setting process. In step S22601, it is determined whether or not the game times to be processed are game times (first start port game times) resulting from the game balls entering the first start port. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag is ON. If the second symbol display unit flag is OFF, it is determined that the game time to be processed is the first start opening game time. When the second symbol display portion flag is ON, it is determined that the game number to be processed is the second start opening game number.

  If it is determined in step S22701 that the game time to be processed is the first start-up game time (S22701: YES), the process proceeds to step S22702. In step S22702, refer to the variable time table for the first start port in the high frequency support mode A stored in the variable time table storage area 63d (denoted as the variable time table for the first start port at the time of high support A in the figure). Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the high frequency support mode A variation time setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22701 that the game time to be processed is not the first start-up game time (S22701: NO), the process proceeds to step S22703. That is, when the game time to be processed is the second start-up game time, the process proceeds to step S22703.

  In step S22703, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the lottery for the game times to be processed is a big hit. If it is determined in step S22703 that the lottery result of the winning game number to be processed is a big win (S22703: YES), the process proceeds to step S22704. In step S22704, the variation type counter CS of this time is referred to with reference to the second start opening jackpot variation time table in the high frequency support mode A (shown as the second start opening jackpot variation time table in the high support A). Get the variation time corresponding to the value of. After that, the high frequency support mode A variation time setting process is terminated.

  In step S22703, when it is determined that the lottery result of the process-target game times is not a big win (S22703: NO), the process proceeds to step S22705. In step S22705, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the process target game times is out of reach (reach occurrence). If it is determined in step S22705 that the lottery result of the winning game number to be processed is out of reach (reach occurrence) (S22705: YES), the process proceeds to step S22706.

  In step S22706, with reference to the variation time table for generating the second start port reach in the high frequency support mode A (shown as the variation time table for generating the second start port reach at the time of high support A), this variation type The variation time corresponding to the value of the counter CS is acquired. After that, the high frequency support mode A variation time setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22705 that the lottery result of the game times to be processed is out of reach (no reach) (S22705: NO), the process proceeds to step S22707.

  In step S22707, referring to the variation time table for non-occurrence of the second start port reach in the high frequency support mode A (shown as a variation time table for non-occurrence of the second start port reach at the time of high support A), this time The variation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the high frequency support mode A variation time setting process is terminated.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 88, in the present variation, in the high frequency support mode A, the variation time when the first start opening game is executed is the same regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Set the variable time by referring to the time table. As explained at the beginning of this modification, in the high frequency support mode A, even if the winning lottery is won in the first start opening game times, the big hit type (big hit B) that shifts to the high frequency support mode B is won. Since the probability of winning is low, the player's expectation for the game time is small even when he recognizes that he will win the big win by the effect at the first start opening game time. That is, the player's sense of expectation is small for the first start opening game regardless of the result of the winning lottery. Therefore, in the present modification, when the first start opening game times are executed in the high frequency support mode A, there is no difference in the variation time between the case where the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the case where the lottery is off Therefore, when the first start opening game is executed in the high frequency support mode A, the same variation time table is referred to regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Furthermore, in this modified example, when the first start opening game times are executed in the high frequency support mode A, the variation time set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the deviation is out The variation time set in is the same or substantially the same. In other words, when the first start opening game times are executed in the high-frequency support mode A, the average value of the variation time set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the deviation is out The average value of the set fluctuation times is the same or substantially the same. Further, in this modified example, in the high frequency support mode A, the average of the variation time set by the variation time table for the first start port at the time of high support A that is referred to when the first start port game times are executed. When the second start opening game times are executed, the second start opening big hit fluctuation time table at the time of high support A, the second start opening reach fluctuation time table at the time of high support A, the time of high support A Each variation time table is configured to be shorter than the average value of the variation times set by the second start port reach non-occurrence variation time table. In other words, in the present modified example, in the high frequency support mode A, the variation of the second start opening game times in which the average value of the fluctuation times of the first start opening game times in which the player's expectation is small is large. It is comprised so that it may become shorter than the average value of time. By adopting such a configuration, in the state of the high frequency support mode A, the fluctuation time of the first start opening game times can be shortened to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation. (2) It is possible to raise the player's sense of expectancy by making the variation time of the start opening game times relatively long. In addition, in the high frequency support mode A, the player may not want to win a jackpot at the first start opening game times. In such a case, the player has a relatively long period of time at the first start opening game times. , And performing an effect that defeats the player's expectation such as winning or losing the jackpot, the player is uncomfortable. Therefore, in the case of the high frequency support mode A as in this modification, the average value of the variation time of the first start opening game times is made relatively short, thereby reducing or suppressing the player's discomfort with the game. be able to.

<Fluctuation time setting process for high frequency support mode B>
Next, the changing time setting process for the high frequency support mode B will be described. The variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode B is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine for the variable time setting process (FIG. 87: S22506).

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the high-frequency support mode B variation time setting process. In step S22801, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is a game time (first start port game time) resulting from the entry of a game ball into the first start port. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second symbol display unit flag is ON. If the second symbol display unit flag is OFF, it is determined that the game time to be processed is the first start opening game time. When the second symbol display portion flag is ON, it is determined that the game number to be processed is the second start opening game number.

  If it is determined in step S22801 that the game time to be processed is the first start-up game time (S22801: YES), the process proceeds to step S22802. In step S22802, refer to the first start port variation time table in the high frequency support mode B stored in the variation time table storage area 63d (shown as the first start port variation time table in the high support mode B). Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the high frequency support mode A variation time setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22801 that the game time to be processed is not the first start-up game time (S22801: NO), the process proceeds to step S22803. That is, when the game time to be processed is the second start-up game time, the process proceeds to step S22803.

  In step S22803, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the lottery for the game times to be processed is a big hit. If it is determined in step S22803 that the lottery result of the winning game number to be processed is a big win (S22803: YES), the process proceeds to step S22804. In step S22804, the variation type counter CS of this time is referred to with reference to the second start opening jackpot variation time table in the high-frequency support mode B (shown as the second start opening jackpot variation time table in the high support B). Get the variation time corresponding to the value of. After that, the high frequency support mode A variation time setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22803 that the lottery result of the winning game number to be processed is not a big win (S22803: NO), the process proceeds to step S22805. In step S22805, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the lottery for the game time to be processed is out of reach (reach occurrence). If it is determined in step S22805 that the lottery result of the winning game number to be processed is out of reach (reach occurrence) (S22805: YES), the process proceeds to step S22806.

  In step S22806, with reference to the variation time table for generating the second start port reach in the high frequency support mode B (shown as the variation time table for generating the second start port reach at the time of high support B), the variation type of this time The variation time corresponding to the value of the counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode B is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22805 that the lottery result of the winning game number to be processed is out of reach (no reach) (S22805: NO), the process proceeds to step S22807.

  In step S22807, referring to the second start port reach non-occurrence variation time table in the high frequency support mode B (shown as the second start port reach non-occurrence variation time table at the time of high support B), this time The variation time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the variable time setting process for the high frequency support mode B is terminated.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 89, in the high-frequency support mode B, as in the high-frequency support mode A, the player's expectation is small when the first start opening game times are executed. Accordingly, when the variation time of the first start opening game times is set in the high frequency support mode B, similarly to the case where the variation time of the first start opening game times is set in the high frequency support mode A, the winning lottery lottery is performed. The same variation time table is referred to regardless of the result. In addition, when the second start opening game times are executed, the average value of the variation times set by the first start opening variation time table at the time of high support B referred to when the first start opening game times are executed. The second start opening big hit variation time table at high support B, the second start opening reach generation time table at high support B, and the second start opening reach non-occurrence change time table at high support B Each variation time table is configured to be shorter than the average value of the variation times. That is, even in the high frequency support mode B, the average value of the variation time of the first start opening game times is configured to be shorter than the average value of the change time of the second start opening game times. By adopting such a configuration, in the state of the high frequency support mode B, the fluctuation time of the first start opening game times can be shortened to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation. (2) It is possible to raise the player's sense of expectancy by making the variation time of the start opening game times relatively long.

<Direction pattern setting processing>
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an effect pattern setting process in Modification 12. The effect pattern setting process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 62: S2003) of the game times effect process in the second embodiment. That is, in this modification, instead of the effect pattern setting process described in FIG. 63 of the second embodiment, the effect pattern setting process shown in FIG. 90 described below is employed.

  In step S22901, it is determined whether the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON. If it is determined in step S22901 that neither the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag nor the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S22901: NO), the process proceeds to step S22902.

  In step S22902, a low frequency support mode effect pattern setting process is executed. The effect pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode is a process for setting an effect pattern to be executed in the game times executed in the state of the low frequency support mode. Details of the low-frequency support mode effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step S22902, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22901 that the sound light side high frequency support mode A flag or the sound light side high frequency support mode B flag is ON (S22901: YES), the process proceeds to step S22903.

  In step S22903, it is determined whether or not the sound side high frequency support mode A flag is ON. If it is determined in step S22903 that the sound side high frequency support mode A flag is ON (S22903: YES), the process proceeds to step S22904.

  In step S22904, a high frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process is executed. The production pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A is a process for setting an effect pattern to be executed in the game times executed in the state of the high frequency support mode A. Details of the high-frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step S22904, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S22903 that the sound side high frequency support mode A flag is not ON (S22903: NO), the process proceeds to step S22905.

  In step S22905, a high frequency support mode B effect pattern setting process is executed. The production pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode B is a process for setting an effect pattern to be executed in the game times executed in the state of the high frequency support mode B. Details of the high-frequency support mode B effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step S22905, the effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Indication pattern setting processing for low frequency support mode>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the low frequency support mode will be described. The low frequency support mode effect pattern setting process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 90: S22902) of the effect pattern setting process.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a low-frequency support mode effect pattern setting process. In step S23001, it is determined whether the game time to be processed is the first start port game time or the second start port game time. If it is determined in step S23001 that the game time to be processed is the first start-up game time (S23001: YES), the process proceeds to step S23002.

  In step S23002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the lottery for the game times to be processed is a big win. In step S23002, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning game lottery to be processed is a big win (S23002: YES), the process proceeds to step S23003.

  In step S23003, the low frequency support mode first start opening jackpot effect pattern setting process (in the figure, the low support first start opening jackpot effect pattern setting process) is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern to be executed when a big win is won in the first start opening game times in the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, since the probability that the first start opening game times are continuously executed is high, the effect that improves the player's expectation is executed in the effects executed in the first start opening game times. More specifically, an effect of improving the player's expectation is executed rather than an effect executed in the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A described later. That is, even in the same first start opening game times, the player's sense of expectation will be different if the game state to be executed is different. In the high frequency support mode A, in addition to the execution of the first start opening game times, the second start opening game times that are more advantageous to the player are also frequently executed (the first start opening game times and the second start opening game times). Times are executed alternately). Therefore, in the high frequency support mode A, the player does not have much expectation for the first start opening game times. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, only the first start opening game times are executed with high probability. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the player has a sense of expectation for the first start opening game times. Therefore, in the first start opening game times in the low frequency support mode, the effect of improving the player's expectation is executed as compared with the effects executed in the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A. For example, in the first start opening game times in the low frequency support mode, the length of time for executing the effect (the length of the fluctuation time) is changed for each lottery result of the winning lottery. More specifically, out of the three (outage (no reach)), out (reach occurrence), and jackpot, the length of time (fluctuation time) for performing the effect in the outage (no reach) is the shortest. It is configured such that the length of time for executing the effect in the case of losing (reach occurrence) (variation time) is short, and the length of time for executing the effect in the big hit (variation time) is the longest. In addition, the time taken for the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the winning lottery to stop or the production corresponding thereto is made longer than the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A. By doing in this way, the 1st start opening game time in low frequency support mode can make a player's expectation improve compared with the 1st start opening game time in high frequency support mode A.

  After executing step S23003, the low frequency support mode effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23002 that the lottery result of the process target game number win is not a big win (S23002: NO), the process proceeds to step S23004.

  In step S23004, the low frequency support mode first start opening effect pattern setting process (in the figure, the low support first start opening effect pattern setting process) is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out of place at the first start opening game times in the low frequency support mode. As described above, in the low frequency support mode, the probability that the first start opening game times are continuously executed is high, so that the game is performed rather than the effect executed in the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A. Production of contents that improve the expectation of the user.

  After executing step S23004, the low frequency support mode effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  In step S23001, when it is determined that the game time to be processed is not the first start-up game time (S23001: NO), the process proceeds to step S23005.

  In step S23005, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the lottery for the game times to be processed is a big hit. In step S23005, when it is determined that the lottery result of the winning game number to be processed is a big win (S23005: YES), the process proceeds to step S23006.

  In step S23006, the low frequency support mode second start opening jackpot effect pattern setting process (in the figure, the low support 2 start opening big hit effect pattern setting process) is executed. This process is a process of setting a pattern of effects to be executed when a big win is won in the second start opening game times in the low frequency support mode. In the low frequency support mode, the possibility that a game ball enters the second start port 34 is extremely low. In spite of such a state, when the game ball enters the second start opening 34 and the second start opening game round is executed, and the jackpot is won, this processing is executed. Therefore, in the present process, an effect of content that greatly improves the player's expectation is set. After executing step S23006, the low frequency support mode effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23005 that the lottery result of the winning game times to be processed is out of play (S23005: NO), the process proceeds to step S23007.

  In step S23007, the low frequency support mode second start opening removal effect pattern setting process (in the figure, the low support second start opening removal effect pattern setting process) is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out of place at the second start opening game times in the low frequency support mode. In this process as well, similar to step S23006, an effect with content that greatly improves the player's expectation is set. After executing Step S23007, the low frequency support mode effect pattern setting process is terminated.

<Production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode A>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode A is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 90: S22904) of the effect pattern setting process.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the high frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process. In step S23101, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is the first start opening game time. If it is determined in step S23101 that the game time to be processed is the first start opening game time (S23101: YES), the process proceeds to step S23102.

  In step S23102, it is determined whether the continuous effect flag is ON. In this modified example, when the first start opening game times are executed twice consecutively in the high frequency support mode A, the first game opening of the two first start opening game times is the hit. When the lottery result of the lottery is out of play, a continuous effect that executes a series of effects across the two game times is executed as a specific effect. The continuous effect flag is turned ON when setting a pattern of an effect to be executed in the continuous effect, and is turned OFF at the start of the second game time in which the continuous effect is set.

  If it is determined in step S23102 that the continuous performance flag is not ON (S23102: NO), the process proceeds to step S23103. In step S23103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time that is the processing target is a big hit.

  If it is determined in step S23103 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time to be processed is not a big win (S23103: NO), the process proceeds to step S23104. In step S23104, it is determined whether or not the next game time that is reserved is the first start-up game time. If it is determined in step S23104 that the next game time is the first start-up game time (S23104: YES), the process proceeds to step S23105, and the continuous effect flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S23106.

  In step S23106, an effect pattern setting process for continuous effects is executed. In this process, with respect to two first start opening game times for executing a continuous effect, an effect pattern for two game times is determined in this process. Details of the content of the effect set in the setting process of the effect pattern for continuous effect will be described later. After executing step S23106, the high frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23102 that the continuous performance flag is ON (S23102: YES), the process proceeds to step S23107. In step S23107, the continuous effect flag is turned OFF. That is, when setting the effect of the first start opening game times to be processed, the case where the continuous effect flag is already ON means that the effect pattern of the continuous effects has already been set for the first start opening game times to be processed. This is the case. Therefore, in that case, the continuous effect flag is turned OFF and the high frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S23104 that the next game time is not the first start-up game time (S23104: NO), the process proceeds to step S23108. In step S23108, the high frequency support mode A first start opening effect pattern setting process (in the figure, the high support A first start opening effect pattern setting process) is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out of the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A. Details of the contents of the effect set in the setting process of the high-frequency support mode A first start opening effect pattern will be described later. After executing step S23108, the high frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23103 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time to be processed is a big win (S23103: YES), the process proceeds to step S23109. In step S23109, the high frequency support mode A first start opening jackpot effect pattern setting process (in the figure, the high support A first start opening big hit effect pattern setting process) is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit at the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A. Details of the contents set in the high frequency support mode A first start opening jackpot effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step S23109, the high frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23101 that the game time to be processed is not the first start-up game time (S23101: NO), the process proceeds to step S23110. In step S23110, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time that is the processing target is a big hit.

  If it is determined in step S23110 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times to be processed is a big win (S23110: YES), the process proceeds to step S23111.

  In step S23111, the high frequency support mode A second start opening jackpot effect pattern setting process (in the figure, the high support A second start opening big hit effect pattern setting process) is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit in the second start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A. Details of the contents set in the high frequency support mode A second start opening jackpot effect pattern setting process will be described later. After executing step S23111, the high frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23110 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times to be processed is out (S23110: NO), the process proceeds to step S23112.

  In step S23112, the high frequency support mode A second start opening effect pattern setting process (in the figure, the high support A second start opening effect pattern setting process) is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out of the second start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A. Details of the contents of the effect set in the setting process of the high-frequency support mode A second start-off effect pattern will be described later. After executing step S23112, the high frequency support mode A effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  Next, the effect pattern in the game times of the high frequency support mode A will be described.

  FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an effect pattern in the first start opening game times of the high frequency support mode A. First, an effect pattern other than the above-described continuous effect will be described, and thereafter, an effect pattern of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 93 (a) and FIG. 93 (b) show the state of the effect pattern immediately after the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A are started. As shown in the figure, in the first start opening game time of the high frequency support mode A, a battle effect is executed, and a turtle character indicating the player side and an octopus character indicating the enemy side are fighting. Is displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in the figure, at this time, the main display area MA is displayed on the upper right side of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal design is fluctuating. As described above, the first start opening game time in the high frequency support mode A is a game time that is more disadvantageous for the player than the second start opening game time in the high frequency support mode A. Immediately after the start opening game round is started, the octopus indicating the enemy side attacks the turtle indicating the player side, suggesting that the player side is in a disadvantaged situation.

  When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start opening game game of the high frequency support mode A is out of place, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the display surface 41a shows that the turtle indicating the player side is defeated. Is displayed. Thereafter, although not shown in the figure, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the disengagement is stopped. The high support A first start-off effect pattern suggests that the player is in an unfavorable situation and suggests that the player has lost. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (b) → FIG. 93 (c) is an example of the high support A first start-off effect pattern shown in step S23108 of FIG.

  When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start opening game times of the high frequency support mode A is the big hit A, as shown in FIGS. 93 (d) and 93 (e), a turtle indicating the player side is displayed. The display screen 41a displays a state in which the current state is maintained while withstanding an octopus attack indicating the enemy side. Thereafter, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the big hit A is stopped and displayed. The fact that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A is a big hit A means that the current gaming state (the high frequency support mode A) is the next game after the end of the gaming time. It means that it is maintained even in times. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 93 (d) and 93 (e), when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start opening game times of the high frequency support mode A is the big hit A, the current gaming state An effect suggesting that is maintained is executed.

  When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start opening game times of the high frequency support mode A is the big hit B, as shown in FIGS. 93 (f) and 93 (g), a turtle indicating the player side is displayed. The display surface 41a displays a state in which the octopus showing the enemy side withstands the attack and then the turtle showing the player attacks the enemy and wins. Thereafter, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the big hit B is stopped and displayed. The fact that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start opening game times of the high frequency support mode A is the big win B means that the game state is advantageous over the current game state (high frequency support mode A) in the next and subsequent game times. It means to move to. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 93 (f) and 93 (g), when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start opening game times of the high frequency support mode A is the big hit B, the current gaming state An effect that suggests a transition to a more advantageous gaming state is executed.

  93 (a) → FIG. 93 (b) → FIG. 93 (d) → FIG. 93 (e) and FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (b) → FIG. 93 (f) → FIG. 93 (g) The effect pattern shown is an example of the effect pattern for high support A first start-up jackpot shown in step S23109 of FIG.

  As described above, in the first start opening game times executed in the high frequency support mode A, the variation time is set using the same variation time table regardless of the winning lottery result. Therefore, the execution time of the effect described in FIG. 93 is also set regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Further, in the present modification, the variation time set for the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A is the same or substantially the same regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. More specifically, the variation time set when the lottery result is a big win and the variation time set when the lottery result is out (reach occurrence and non-reach occurrence) are the same or substantially the same.

  FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a continuous performance in the first start opening game times of the high frequency support mode A.

  As described above, when the first start opening game times are executed twice consecutively in the high frequency support mode A, the continuous effect is executed. That is, among the game times (first start port game times and second start port game times) executed in the high frequency support mode A, the first start port game times that are disadvantageous for the player are continuously performed twice. Therefore, it is more disadvantageous for the player than when the first start opening game times and the second start opening game times are executed alternately. Therefore, in the continuous effect, an effect that suggests that the degree of disadvantage for the player is large across the two first start opening game times is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b), the octopus indicating the enemy side is displayed larger, which indicates that the degree of disadvantage of the player is large. In the continuous performance, the performance pattern of FIG. 94 (a) → FIG. 94 (b) is executed in the first of the two first start opening game times, and corresponds to the main display area MA on the upper right side. The liquid crystal symbol to be displayed is stopped.

  When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first start-up game game is unacceptable, as shown in FIG. 94 (c), the display surface 41a displays a state in which the turtle indicating the player side is defeated. The After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal design indicating that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first start opening game is out of display is displayed. To do.

  If the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first opening game game is a big hit A, as shown in FIGS. 94 (d) and 94 (e), the turtle indicating the player side moves the enemy side. The display screen 41a displays a state in which the current state is maintained with the octopus attack shown. After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal design indicating that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first start-up game game is a jackpot A is stopped. indicate.

  When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first start opening game round is a big hit B, as shown in FIGS. 94 (f) and 94 (g), the turtle indicating the player side moves the enemy side. The display screen 41a displays that the turtle showing the player has won the attack, and then won by attacking the enemy. After that, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal design indicating that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second first start opening game is the big hit B is stopped. indicate.

  As described above, when the first start game time is executed twice in a high frequency support mode A, a continuous effect that indicates that the degree of disadvantage is large for the player is executed as a specific effect. Is done. By executing the continuous production in such a manner, a sense of urgency or a sense of crisis is given to the player, and if the big hit B is won in the second first opening game game, A sense of accomplishment can be imparted.

  In the case where the continuous performance is executed, the variation time of the first first opening game time and the first first opening game time of the first starting port game times executed continuously twice. Is the same as the setting method of the variation time in the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A. That is, the variation time of the first start opening game times in which the continuous effect is executed is the variation time using the same variation time table (the first start port variation time table at high support A) regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. Set. Further, in this modification, the variation time set for the first start opening game times executed twice in the high frequency support mode A is the same or substantially the same regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. It is. Specifically, the variation time set when the lottery result of the first start opening game round is a big hit and the variation time set when it is out (reach occurrence and non-reach occurrence) are the same or substantially the same. is there.

  FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an effect pattern in the second start opening game times of the high frequency support mode A.

  FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b) show the appearance patterns immediately after the start of the second start-up game in the high-frequency support mode A. As shown in the figure, in the second start opening game round of the high frequency support mode A, a battle effect is executed, and a turtle character indicating the player side and an octopus character indicating the enemy side are fighting. Is displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in the figure, at this time, the main display area MA is displayed on the upper right side of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal design is fluctuating. As described above, the second start opening game time in the high frequency support A is a game time more advantageous to the player than the first start opening game time in the high frequency support mode A. Immediately after the mouth game is started, the turtle indicating the player side attacks the octopus indicating the enemy side, suggesting that the player side is in an advantageous situation.

  When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second start opening game round in the high frequency support mode A is out of play, the turtle indicating the player side attacks the octopus indicating the enemy side as shown in FIG. 95 (c). The state of being defeated is displayed on the display surface 41a. Thereafter, although not shown in the figure, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the disengagement is stopped. In the high-sapo A second start-off direction effect pattern, it is suggested that the player side has been defeated after suggesting that the player is in an advantageous situation. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 95 (a) → FIG. 95 (b) → FIG. 95 (c) is an example of the high support A second start-off-off effect pattern shown in step S23112 of FIG.

  When the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A is the big hit B, as shown in FIGS. 95 (d) and 95 (e), a turtle indicating the player side is displayed. A state in which the octopus indicating the enemy side is attacked and then the turtle indicating the player wins the octopus indicating the enemy side is displayed on the display surface 41a. Thereafter, although not shown, the main display area MA is displayed at the center of the display surface 41a, and the liquid crystal symbol indicating the big hit B is stopped and displayed. The fact that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second start opening game times in the high-frequency support mode A is a big win B means that the gaming state is advantageous over the current gaming state (high-frequency support mode A) in the next gaming round. It means to move to. Therefore, when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the second start opening game times of the high-frequency support mode A is the big hit B, an effect suggesting that the game state is shifted to an advantageous gaming state over the current gaming state is executed. . In the second embodiment and this modification, the jackpot A is not set as the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the second start opening game round, so the jackpot A is won in the second starting slot game round. The effect pattern in the case is not provided as a configuration.

  95 (a) → FIG. 95 (b) → FIG. 95 (d) → FIG. 95 (e) corresponds to the high support A second start opening jackpot effect pattern shown in step S23111 of FIG. It is an example.

  As described above, the variation time set for the second start-up game times in the high-frequency support mode A differs depending on the lottery result of the winning lottery. More specifically, a variation time table that is referred to in the variation time setting process when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big win, when the lottery is out (reach occurrence), and when it is out (reach occurrence). Are different (see FIG. 88). In this modification, the variation time set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big win (or the average value of the variation time) is the longest, and the variation time set when it is out (reach occurrence) next The fluctuation time (or the average value of the fluctuation time) set when the (or the average value of the fluctuation time) is long and is out of place (no reach) is shortest.

  As described above, the effect patterns in the game times of the high frequency support mode A have been described.

<Production pattern setting process for high frequency support mode B>
Next, the production pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode B will be described. The effect pattern setting process for the high frequency support mode B is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 90: S22905) of the effect pattern setting process.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the high frequency support mode B effect pattern setting process. In step S23201, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is the first start opening game time. If it is determined in step S 23201 that the game time to be processed is the first start-up game time (S 23201: YES), the process proceeds to step S 23202. In step S23202, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time that is the processing target is a big hit.

  If it is determined in step S23202 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time to be processed is a big win (S23202: YES), the process proceeds to step S23203. In step S23203, a high frequency support mode B first start opening jackpot effect pattern setting process (in the figure, referred to as a high support B first start opening big hit effect pattern setting process) is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit in the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode B. Also in the high frequency support mode B, similarly to the high frequency support mode A, the first start opening game times are disadvantageous for the player than the second start opening game times. Therefore, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, for example, as in the effect pattern of the high frequency support mode A first start opening game times, for example, FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (b) → FIG. 93 (d). ) → The effect pattern shown in FIG. 93 (e) is set. When the jackpot type is jackpot B, for example, an effect pattern of FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (b) → FIG. 93 (f) → FIG. 93 (g) is set. After executing step S23203, the high frequency support mode B effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23202 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game times to be processed is not a big win (S23202: NO), the process proceeds to step S23204. In step S23204, high frequency support mode B first start opening effect pattern setting processing (in the figure, referred to as high support B first start opening effect pattern setting processing) is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out of the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode B. The effect pattern set in this process is similar to the effect pattern of the high frequency support mode A first start opening game times, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (b) → FIG. 93 (c). A pattern is set. After executing step S23204, the high frequency support mode B effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23201 that the game time to be processed is not the first start-up game time (S23201: NO), the process proceeds to step S23205. In step S23205, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time that is the processing target is a big hit.

  If it is determined in step S23205 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time to be processed is a big win (S23205: YES), the process proceeds to step S23206.

  In step S23206, high frequency support mode B second start opening jackpot effect pattern setting process (in the figure, high support B second starting opening jackpot effect pattern setting process) is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit in the second start opening game times in the high frequency support mode B.

  Also in the high frequency support mode B, as in the high frequency support mode A, the second start opening game times are more advantageous to the player than the first start opening game times. Therefore, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, for example, as in the high-frequency support mode A second start-up game times effect pattern, for example, FIG. 95 (a) → FIG. 95 (b) → FIG. ) → The production pattern shown in FIG. 95 (e) is set. After executing step S23206, the high frequency support mode B effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S23205 that the lottery result of the winning lottery in the game time that is the processing target is out (S23205: NO), the process proceeds to step S23207.

  In step S23207, a high frequency support mode B second start opening effect pattern setting process (in the figure, referred to as a high support B second start opening effect pattern setting process) is executed. This process is a process of setting an effect pattern to be executed when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out of the second start opening game times in the high frequency support mode B. The effect pattern set in this process is similar to the effect pattern of the high frequency support mode A second start opening game times, for example, the effect of FIG. 95 (a) → FIG. 95 (b) → FIG. 95 (c). A pattern is set. After executing step S23207, the high frequency support mode B effect pattern setting process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present modification, the variation time table used when determining the variation time of the first start opening game times executed in the high frequency support mode A is the lottery for the first start opening game times. The same variation time table (the first variation time table for the first start port at the time of high support A) is used regardless of the lottery result of the above, so in the state of the high frequency support mode A, it is relatively The lottery result of the first start opening game times, which is disadvantageous, can be prevented from paying attention, and a decrease in the player's expectation due to the execution of the first start opening game times can be suppressed.

  More specifically, in the low frequency support mode, when determining the variation time in the first start opening game times, a different variation time table is used for each lottery result of the winning lottery, and in the high frequency support mode A, When determining the variation time in the first start opening game times, the same variation time table is used regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. That is, in the low frequency support mode, the variation time is set for each lottery result of the first start opening game times, whereas in the high frequency support mode A, the lottery result of the first start opening game times is related. There is no change in the fluctuation time. By doing in this way, between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode A, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of paying attention to the lottery result of the first start opening game times. In the low frequency support mode, since the variation time is provided for each lottery result of the first start opening game times, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the lottery result. In the high frequency support mode A, no change is made in the variation time regardless of the result of the first lottery game lottery, so that it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the lottery result. Therefore, between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode A, the player's degree of attention can be changed for the first start opening game times, and the player's attention to the game and a decrease in expectation can be reduced. Can be suppressed. Also, in the high frequency support mode A, the degree of attention of the result of the lottery of the first start opening game times that is not advantageous to the player is lowered, and the degree of attention of the result of the lottery of the second start opening game times that is advantageous to the player Can be raised. As a result, a decrease in the player's expectation can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode A, when determining the variation time in the first start opening game times, the same variation time table is used regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery, and therefore, it varies depending on the lottery result of the winning lottery. Compared with the case of determining the variation time using the variation time table, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the variation time table and to simplify the processing when determining the variation time.

  In the high frequency support mode A, the player is more likely to be reminded that the first start opening game times are disadvantageous than the second start opening game times, and the player is performing during the first start opening game times. May reduce the sense of expectation. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation regarding the execution of the first start opening game in the high frequency support mode A. Therefore, if the period during which the first start opening game round is executed (that is, the variation time) is set to be relatively shorter than the period during which the second start opening game round is executed (variation time). In the high frequency support mode A, the player is more aware of the execution of the second start opening game times than the execution of the first start opening game times. In other words, in the high frequency support mode A, the player can feel that the variation time of the first start opening game times is short and can feel that the variation time of the second start opening game times is long. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation over the entire support mode A period.

  In the present modification, as one form thereof, in the high frequency support mode A, the average value of the variation time of the first start port game times varies so as to be shorter than the average value of the variation time of the second start port game times. Determine the time. That is, the average value of the variation time of the first start opening game times actually executed in the high frequency support mode A is the average value of the change time of the second start opening game times actually executed in the high frequency support mode A. To make it shorter. For example, four variable time tables used in the high frequency support mode A variable time setting process (first start port variable time table at high support A, second start port big hit variable time table at high support A, and high support A In the second start-port reach occurrence variation time table and the high support A second start-port reach non-occurrence variation time table (see FIG. 88), recording and setting corresponding to the value of the random number (variation type counter CS) The average value of the fluctuation time (or the information corresponding to the fluctuation time) is the longest change time table for the second start opening big hit at the time of high support A, the change time table for the second start opening reach generation at the time of high support A Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the second start port reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table at high support A time and the first start port change time table at high support time A are arranged in this order.

  In addition, in the high frequency support mode A, the average value of the variation time of the first start opening game times where the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big win is the variation time of the second start opening game times where the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit The average value of the variation time of the first start opening game times in which the winning lottery result is out of reach (reach occurrence) in the high frequency support mode A may be adopted. The result may be shorter than the average value of the variation time of the second start-up game times in which the result is out of reach (reach occurs). In the high-frequency support mode A, the result of the winning lottery is out (reach non-reach) Adopted a configuration in which the average value of the variation time of the first start-up game times is less than the average value of the variation time of the second start-up game times where the winning lottery result is out of reach (no reach) May be A configuration may be adopted to provide all of these features.

  For example, in this modification, there is only one variation time table used when setting the variation time of the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A, but the lottery result of the lottery per first start opening game times You may divide the variable time table used for every. In other words, the first start port big hit variation time table at high support A, the first start port reach variation time table at high support A, and the first start port reach non-occurrence change time table at high support A. To do. Then, the average value of the fluctuation time (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) recorded in the first start opening big hit fluctuation time table at high support A is the second start opening big hit fluctuation time table at high support A. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the time is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation times recorded in (or information corresponding to the fluctuation times). Further, the average value of the fluctuation time (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) recorded in the fluctuation time table for generating the first start port reach at the time of high support A is the change for generating the second start port reach at the time of high support A. You may employ | adopt the structure shorter than the average value of the fluctuation | variation time (or information corresponding to fluctuation | variation time) currently recorded on the time table. Furthermore, the average value of the fluctuation time (or information corresponding to the fluctuation time) recorded in the fluctuation time table for the first start-up reach non-occurrence at high support A is the second start-up reach non-occurrence at the high support A. A configuration shorter than the average value of the fluctuation times (or information corresponding to the fluctuation times) recorded in the use fluctuation time table may be adopted.

  By doing in this way, it can suppress that a player's sense of expectation falls during the period when the 1st start opening game turn is performed. And the degree of attention of the result of the lottery of the first start opening game times that is not advantageous for the player is lowered relative to the degree of attention of the result of the lottery of the second start opening game times that is advantageous for the player, On the contrary, the degree of attention of the result of the lottery of the second start opening game times that is advantageous to the player is raised relatively to the degree of attention of the result of the lottery of the first opening opening game times that is not advantageous to the player. be able to.

  Furthermore, in this modified example, in the high frequency support mode A, the effect that the octopus attacks the turtle at the first start opening game time is executed, and the effect that the turtle attacks the octopus is executed at the second start opening game time. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize which of the first start opening game time and the second start opening game time is being executed, and to assist the player in understanding the flow of the game. Can do.

  Further, in the high frequency support mode A, it is suggested that the player side is in a disadvantageous situation by performing an effect in which the octopus indicating the enemy side attacks the turtle indicating the player side in the first start opening game round, It is suggested that the player side is in an advantageous situation by performing an effect in which the turtle indicating the player side attacks the octopus indicating the enemy side in the second start opening game round. By executing such an effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether the game time being executed is a game time advantageous to the player or a game time unfavorable to the player, It is possible to further assist the player's understanding of the game flow.

  Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode B, when the first start opening game round is executed, an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of shifting to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the current gaming state (FIG. 93 (a ) → FIG. 93 (b) → FIG. 93 (d) → FIG. 93 (e) effect pattern / FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (b) → FIG. 93 (f) → FIG. 93 (g) effect pattern) Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether the game times to be executed are advantageous or unfavorable in a game state that changes in a complicated manner, and further assists the player in understanding the game flow. can do.

  Further, in the high frequency support mode A, when the first start opening game times are continuously executed twice, a continuous effect is executed as a specific effect. Therefore, for a player who recognizes the execution of a specific effect, Recognize that a low-probability event has occurred, such as a game ball entering the first starting port twice in succession, and triggering the player's curiosity for the occurrence of a low-probability event Can improve the interest of the game. Note that the specific effect is not limited to the continuous effect, and a configuration may be adopted in which an effect in which an effect pattern is set is executed for each of the two first start opening game times. In addition, a specific effect may be executed at least one of the two first start opening game times.

  In the second embodiment, a special symbol (a symbol that varies when triggered by entering the starting port) is used as the first symbol, and a normal symbol (an electric utility release lottery, an electric utility release lottery) is used as the second symbol. May be employed, or a normal symbol may be employed as the first symbol and a special symbol may be employed as the second symbol. In addition, a configuration may be employed in which the first type entrance means is the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b) and the second type entrance means is the second start port 34. The first type entrance means may be the second start port 34, and the second type entrance means may be the first start port 33 (first start port 33a, first start port 33b).

  In addition, in this modification, when the first start opening game times are executed in the high frequency support mode A, the variation time set when the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit and the deviation time As a configuration in which the set variation time is the same or substantially the same, in the high frequency support mode A, the variation time when the first start opening game is executed is related to the lottery result of the winning lottery. When the first variation of the first start opening game is executed in the high frequency support mode A, the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit. Any configuration may be adopted as long as the set variation time and the variation time set in the case of deviation are the same or substantially the same.

  For example, when the first start opening game is executed in the high-frequency support mode A, a variable time table that is referred to according to the lottery result of the winning lottery is prepared. Specifically, a variation time table for jackpot, a variation time table for detachment (reach occurrence), and a variation time for detachment (no reach occurrence) are prepared, and the variation times recorded in these tables ( Alternatively, a configuration in which the information corresponding to the variation time) is the same or substantially the same between the variation time tables may be adopted. In addition, in the high frequency support mode A, the same variation time (always, a constant variation time) is always set as the variation time when the first start game is executed regardless of the lottery result of the winning lottery. A configuration may be adopted. Specifically, only one value of the variation time (or information corresponding to the variation time) of the first start opening game times in the high frequency support mode A is stored, and any of the first start opening game times is stored. A configuration may be adopted in which one stored variation time is set for the variation time, or one variation time table is prepared and the variation time (or variation) stored in the variation time table is prepared. A configuration in which the information corresponding to time) is all the same or substantially the same may be adopted.

  In this modification, when the first start opening game times are continuously executed twice or more in the high-frequency support mode A, a configuration in which a continuous effect is executed as a specific effect is adopted. It may be adopted. For example, in the high frequency support mode A, when the second start opening game times are continuously executed twice or more, a configuration in which a continuous effect is executed as a specific effect may be adopted. In this case, since it is advantageous for the player that the second start opening game times are continuously executed in the high frequency support A, for example, as a continuous performance, a turtle indicating the player side shows an octopus indicating the enemy side. You may employ | adopt the structure which performs the production which attacks. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

C. Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right by generating a right, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball and the like.

  Also, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, the reel rotation is started by the insertion of medals and the operation of the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, a part of the function realized by software may be realized by hardware, or a part of the function realized by hardware may be realized by software.

D. About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc.
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 6, 8, and 10-12 thereof.

[Feature A1]
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
A rod-like member (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board and changing the circulation of the game ball;
When viewed from a predetermined direction (when viewed from the upper side to the lower side, when viewed from the right side to the left side), a reference portion (first number) provided on the game board so as to be parallel to the rod-shaped member. A third edge 333, a fourth edge 334 at the entrance 33a of the first start opening 33, an upper surface 633S of the first start opening 633, a first mark 951, a second mark 952, and a mark 1051);
A gaming machine comprising:

  For example, a rod-like member such as a nail that changes the circulation of the game ball may be different from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as accidental impact during transportation, for example. . According to the feature A1, when the inclination of the reference portion is determined in advance so as to match the inclination of the rod-shaped member intended by the manufacturer, the reference portion can be relied on when viewed from a predetermined direction. The inclination of the rod-shaped member can be confirmed and corrected so that the rod-shaped member is parallel to the reference portion. For this reason, the shift | offset | difference of the inclination of a rod-shaped member can be easily repaired, without requiring much experience about adjustment of a rod-shaped member, and an exclusive adjustment tool.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine according to feature A1,
Entrance member (first start port 33) that forms an entrance (entrance 33a) through which game balls can enter
With
The rod-shaped member is a nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided above the entrance member,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the reference portion is provided on the entrance member.

  According to the feature A2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the reference portion provided in the entrance port member. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the inclination shift of the nail provided above the entrance port member.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A2,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the reference portion is a margin (third margin 333, fourth margin 334) of the entrance (entrance 33a).

  According to the feature A3, it is possible to repair the inclination of the nail without separately providing a dedicated member as a reference portion for the entrance member, thereby preventing the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated. Can do.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to feature A2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the reference portion is a mark (first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051) attached to the entrance member.

  According to the feature A4, the visibility of the reference portion can be easily increased, and the certainty of repair can be increased.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment and modifications 1 to 6, 8, and 10-12 thereof.

[Feature B1]
A gaming machine,
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
Nails (first nails 42a, second nails 42b) provided on the surface of the game board, which change the circulation of the game balls;
Different means for defining the angle formed between the nail and the surface of the game board at the time of shipment of the gaming machine (third edge 333, fourth at the entrance 33a of the first start port 33) Edge 334, upper surface 633S of the first start port 633, first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051),
A gaming machine comprising:

  The nail that changes the circulation of the game ball may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature B1, the defining means defines the angle formed between the nail and the surface of the game board at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, so that the angle defined by the defining means is based on the defining means. By checking and correcting the inclination of the nail, the nail can be corrected to the inclination at the time of shipment. For this reason, the shift | offset | difference of the inclination of a nail can be repaired easily, without requiring much experience about the adjustment of a nail, and an exclusive adjustment tool.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine according to feature B1,
Entrance member (first start port 33) provided below the nail and forming an entrance (entrance 33a) through which a game ball can enter
With
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the defining means is provided on the entrance member.

  According to the feature B2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the defining means provided in the entrance port member. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the inclination shift of the nail provided above the entrance port member.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B2,
The game machine characterized in that the defining means is a margin (third margin 333, fourth margin 334) of the entrance (entrance 33a).

  According to the feature B3, since it is possible to repair the inclination of the nail without separately providing a dedicated member as the defining means, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the gaming machine from becoming complicated.

[Feature B4]
A gaming machine according to feature B2,
The game machine characterized in that the defining means is a mark (first mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051) attached to the entrance member.

  According to the feature B4, the visibility of the defining means can be easily increased, and the certainty of repair can be increased.

<Feature C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modification 9 of the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
Nails (first nails 42a, second nails 42b) provided on the surface of the game board, which change the circulation of the game balls;
Angle information specifying means (first numerical information Na, second numerical information Nb) indicating information about an angle formed between the nail and the surface of the game board;
A gaming machine comprising:

  The nail that changes the circulation of the game ball may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature C1, the angle information clarification means indicates the information about the angle that matches the inclination of the nail intended by the manufacturer, and the angle information clarification means is used to check and correct the nail inclination. can do. For this reason, the shift | offset | difference of the inclination of a nail can be repaired easily, without requiring much experience about the adjustment of a nail, and an exclusive adjustment tool.

[Feature C2]
A gaming machine according to feature C1,
Entrance member (first start port 33) provided below the nail and forming an entrance (entrance 33a) through which a game ball can enter
With
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the angle information specifying means is provided in the entrance member.

  According to the feature C2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the angle information specifying means provided in the entrance port member. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the inclination shift of the nail provided above the entrance port member.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C2,
As the nail, a first nail provided on one side in a predetermined direction, a second nail provided on the other side in the predetermined direction,
With
The entrance member is
Consists of at least a first part and a second part,
The first part is provided with first angle information indicating means for indicating the angle information about the first nail,
A gaming machine, wherein the second part is provided with second angle information specifying means for indicating the angle information about the second nail.

  According to the feature C3, since the entrance member is composed of at least the first part and the second part, the first part is provided with the first angle information indicating means at the time of manufacture, and the second part is provided with the second part. It is possible to easily provide the second angle information specifying means. In particular, the first angle information specifying means and the second angle information specifying means are oriented in the same direction so that both the first angle information specifying means and the second angle information specifying means can be seen from one side. When one of the angle information specifying means is provided on the inside of the entrance port member, it is difficult to provide the angle information specifying means on the inside at the time of manufacture. Since the mouth member is composed of the first part and the second part, manufacturing is easy.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modified example 5 of the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
Nails (first nails 42a, second nails 42b) provided on the surface of the game board, which change the circulation of the game balls;
Marks for defining the angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board (the third edge 333, the fourth edge 334 at the entrance 33a of the first start port 33, the upper surface 633S of the first start port 633) , First mark 951, second mark 952, mark 1051),
A gaming machine comprising:

  The nail that changes the circulation of the game ball may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature D1, since the mark defines the angle between the nail and the surface of the game board, the inclination of the nail is confirmed and corrected so as to be the angle defined by the mark depending on the mark. In this way, the nail can be corrected to the inclination intended by the manufacturer. For this reason, the shift | offset | difference of the inclination of a nail can be repaired easily, without requiring much experience about the adjustment of a nail, and an exclusive adjustment tool.

[Feature D2]
A gaming machine according to feature D1,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the mark defines the angle of the nail when the game machine is shipped.

  According to the feature D2, it is possible to easily return the inclination of the nail to the state when the gaming machine is shipped.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to Feature D1 or Feature D2,
Entrance member (first start port 33) provided below the nail and forming an entrance (entrance 33a) through which a game ball can enter
With
The game machine, wherein the mark is provided on the entrance member.

  According to the feature D3, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the mark provided on the entrance port member. For this reason, it is possible to easily repair the inclination shift of the nail provided above the entrance port member.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
The mark is parallel to the nail when viewed from a predetermined direction (when viewed from the upper side to the lower side), and at least a part of the mark is not hidden by the nail. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to recognize whether or not the inclination of the nail is the size intended by the manufacturer by checking whether or not the nail is parallel to the mark when viewed from a predetermined direction. In addition, when viewed from a predetermined direction, at least a part of the mark is not hidden by the nail, so that the mark is highly visible. Therefore, according to the feature D4, it is easy to identify the inclination of the nail, and the deviation of the inclination of the nail can be repaired more easily.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Modifications 10 to 12 of the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
Nails (first nails 42a, second nails 42b) provided on the surface of the game board, which change the circulation of the game balls;
The entrance (opening 1400) through which game balls can enter,
A movable portion (movable pieces 1411a, 1411b, 1511a, 1511b, 1611a) provided at the entrance and switchable between a closed state and an open state in order to change the ease of entering the entrance. Movable means (electric accessories 1410, 1510) comprising:
A gaming machine comprising
The movable part is
A gaming machine having a predetermined portion (Sa, Sb, Ha, Hb, Ta) that defines an angle formed by the nail and the surface of the game board.

  The nail that changes the circulation of the game ball may differ from the size intended by the manufacturer due to unintended external factors such as accidental impact during transportation. According to the feature E1, since the predetermined part in the movable part defines an angle between the nail and the surface of the game board, the inclination of the nail is set to an angle defined by the predetermined part depending on the predetermined part. By checking and correcting this, the nail can be corrected to the inclination intended by the manufacturer. For this reason, the shift | offset | difference of the inclination of a nail can be repaired easily, without requiring much experience about the adjustment of a nail, and an exclusive adjustment tool.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine according to feature E1,
The predetermined portion defines the angle of the nail at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature E2, the nail can be easily repaired to the inclination at the time of shipment of the gaming machine.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
In the movable means, when the movable part is in a closed state, the predetermined portion of the movable part defines the angle.

  According to the feature E3, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and repaired so that the angle is defined by the predetermined portion, depending on the predetermined portion of the movable portion in the closed state.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
In the movable means, when the movable part is in an open state, the predetermined portion of the movable part defines the angle.

  According to the feature E4, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and repaired by relying on a predetermined part of the movable part in the open state. In particular, a nail close to the position of the movable part when in the open state can be set as a repair target, and the nail can be easily repaired.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the modified example 7 of the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
A game board constituting a game area in which game balls are distributed;
It is guaranteed that the game board is installed at a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the game board, and a reference portion (first mark 1151, second mark 1152) provided on the game board;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In gaming machines, an accessory such as a nail is installed on the gaming board. According to the feature D1, the inclination of the accessory can be confirmed and corrected by relying on a reference portion that is guaranteed to have a predetermined angle with respect to the surface of the game board. For this reason, it is possible to easily and accurately repair the shift in the inclination of the accessory without requiring much experience in adjusting the inclination of the accessory and a dedicated adjustment tool.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
Nail (first nail 42a, second nail 42b) provided on the surface of the game board to change the circulation of game balls
With
The gaming machine characterized in that the angle guaranteed by the reference portion is a right angle.

  According to the feature F2, the inclination of the nail can be confirmed and corrected by relying on the reference portion that is guaranteed to be installed perpendicular to the surface of the game board. The nail is provided with the inclination intended by the manufacturer, but according to the feature D2, the inclination of the nail can be easily adjusted by comparing the direction of the nail with the reference portion that is guaranteed to be installed vertically. Can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to easily adjust the inclination of the nail.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature G1]
The first type of ball entry means (first start port in the second embodiment) that the game ball enters when the first symbol fluctuates,
A second type of ball entry means (second start port in the second embodiment) that the game ball enters when the second symbol fluctuates;
When a game ball is distributed in a distribution manner that is most advantageous to the player, the number of game balls entering the first type of ball entry means and the game balls of the second type ball input means per unit time A control means for controlling the incoming ball relative ratio, which is a relative ratio to the number of incoming balls, to be changeable in at least three stages;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the characteristic G1, when the game balls are circulated in a distribution manner that is most advantageous to the player, the number of game balls that enter the first type ball entry means and the second type ball entry means per unit time Since the relative ratio of the number of game balls entering the ball is controlled so that it can be changed to at least three stages, it is possible to create various new game flows by combining the three stages of ball relative ratio. Can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G2]
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
Detecting means for detecting that the game ball has passed through a predetermined position;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role release lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
An auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the game ball to enter the second type ball entry means when winning the predetermined lottery;
With
The control means includes
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery execution means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the predetermined lottery to the output of the lottery result is at least two stages: a first lottery execution time and a second lottery execution time shorter than the first lottery execution time. Can be changed,
The auxiliary time, which is the time during which the auxiliary means performs the assistance in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is the first auxiliary time and the second auxiliary time longer than the first auxiliary time. Can be changed in at least two stages,
As the control mode, a first control mode (low frequency support mode), a second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high frequency support mode B) can be executed.
The first control mode is:
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time;
The second control mode is:
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time;
The third control mode is:
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time;
The gaming machine, wherein the pitch relative ratio is changed by switching the control mode.

  According to the feature G2, the control means changes the entrance relative ratio by switching the three control modes in which the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time are different. Thus, it is possible to realize the change of the relative pitch ratio.

<Characteristic H group>
The feature H group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature H1]
The first type of ball entry means (first start port in the second embodiment) that the game ball enters when the first symbol fluctuates,
The second type of ball entry means (first start port in the second embodiment) that the game ball enters when the second symbol fluctuates,
A distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for alternately distributing the reached game balls to the first path (left channel R1) and the second path (right channel R2);
First detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that a game ball has passed a first detection position which is a predetermined position on the second route;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role release lottery) triggered by the first detection means detecting the passage of the game ball;
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for guiding the reached game ball in a predetermined distribution direction when the predetermined lottery is won;
With
The first type ball entry means is arranged at a position where game balls distributed to the first route can enter,
The auxiliary means is arranged at a position where the game balls distributed to the second route can reach,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second type ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball guided in the distribution direction by the auxiliary means can enter.

  According to the feature H1, among the game balls that have reached the distribution means, the game balls distributed to the first route enter the first type ball input means, and the game balls distributed to the second route Of these, the game balls assisted by the assisting means enter the second-type entering means. Therefore, when the game balls are distributed in a distribution manner that reaches the distribution means, the frequency of entering the game balls into the first type ball entry means is determined by changing the winning probability of the predetermined lottery. While keeping constant within the range, it is possible to change the frequency of entering the game ball into the second type ball entry means.

[Feature H2]
A gaming machine according to feature H1,
A second detection means (through gate 35b) for detecting that the second detection position that is different from the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position is passed;
The lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery (electric role release lottery) triggered by the second detection means detecting passage of the game ball,
The auxiliary means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming ball that has passed through the second detection position is disposed at a position where it can be reached.

  According to the feature H2, when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the second detection position without passing through the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position, the game is played only by the second type ball entry means. A ball can be entered. Therefore, by changing the distribution mode, it is possible to change the frequency of entering the first type and second type incoming means.

<Feature I group>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature I1]
A first ball entry means (first start port 33a in the second embodiment) in which a game ball ball is triggered by a change in symbol;
A second ball entry means (first start port 33b in the second embodiment) in which the game ball is triggered when the design ball changes,
A distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths;
A first guide path (left channel R1) for guiding the distributed game balls to the first entrance means;
A second guide path (right flow path R2) for guiding the distributed game balls to the second entrance means;
With
The symbol that changes when the game ball enters the first ball entry means is the same as the symbol that changes when the game ball enters the second ball means. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature I1, even when the game balls are distributed by the distribution unit, the distributed game balls enter the first ball input unit even when they enter the first ball input unit. Even if the ball is played, the same symbol is changed, so that it is possible to give unexpectedness to the player who has been assumed that a different symbol changes for each entry means, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
A first symbol changing means for changing a first symbol triggered by a game ball entering the first and second pitching means;
A third ball entry means (second start port 34) in which the game ball is triggered when the design fluctuates;
Second symbol changing means for changing a second symbol that is different from the first symbol, triggered by the game ball entering the third ball entering means,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature I2, since the game ball is provided with the third ball entry means that triggers the change of the second symbol, in addition to the expectation regarding the fluctuation of the first symbol to the player The expectation regarding the fluctuation | variation of a 2nd symbol can be provided. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player make various assumptions regarding the role of the distribution means, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine described in feature I2,
Auxiliary means that is arranged on a path through which game balls circulate from the allocating means to the second ball entry means, and that assists the game balls flowing through the path to enter the third ball entry means. (Ordinary electric accessory 53) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I3, since the auxiliary means for assisting the entry into the third entry means is provided on the path through which the game balls circulate to the second entry means, the game balls distributed by the assignment means However, if it is an opportunity to change the same symbol (first symbol) regardless of whether it is distributed to the first guide route or the second guide route, the game ball distributed to the second guide route is In some cases, the second symbol may be changed, and the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol may be changed depending on the operation pattern of the auxiliary means.

[Feature I4]
A gaming machine according to feature I3,
A detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that a game ball has passed through a predetermined position on the second guide route;
The auxiliary means includes
When the detection means detects the passage of the game ball, a game ball that circulates on the route from the sorting means to the second ball entry means enters the third ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by assisting.

  According to the characteristic I4, the auxiliary means detects that the game ball that circulates on the route through which the game sphere circulates from the distribution means to the second ball entry means when the detection means detects the passage of the game sphere. Since it assists the player to enter the entrance means, the player is encouraged to distribute the game ball to the second guide route, and when the game ball passes a predetermined position, the player is expected to Can be granted. Further, by urging the player to distribute the game ball to the second guide route, the player can be concentrated on the game.

[Feature I5]
A gaming machine according to feature I4,
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role release lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting the passage of the game ball,
The auxiliary means includes
When the predetermined lottery is won, it assists a game ball that circulates on the route from the sorting means to the second entry means to enter the third entry means. A gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic I5, the auxiliary means is on the route from the sorting means to the second ball entering means when a predetermined lottery executed in response to the detection means detecting the passing of the game ball is won. Since the game balls to be distributed are assisted in entering the third entry means, the ratio of changing the first symbol and the second symbol is controlled by controlling the winning probability in a predetermined lottery. Can do.

[Feature I6]
A gaming machine according to Feature I4 or Feature I5,
When the detection means for detecting the passage through a predetermined position on the second guide route is the first detection means (through gate 35a),
A second detection means (through gate 35b) different from the first detection means for detecting the passage through a specific position different from the position on the path distributed by the distribution means;
The auxiliary means includes
When the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball, it assists the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic I6, the auxiliary means is triggered when the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball whose passage is detected by the second detection means enters the third ball entry means. Since the ball is assisted, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the third entry means via the second detection means without passing through the distribution means. As a result, it is possible to create a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be entered only by the third entering means with a high probability.

[Feature I7]
A gaming machine according to Feature I6,
The lottery execution means
The predetermined lottery is executed when the second detecting means detects the passing of the game ball,
The auxiliary means includes
A gaming machine that assists a game ball whose passage has been detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means when the predetermined lottery is won.

  According to the characteristic I7, when the auxiliary means wins a predetermined lottery executed when the second detecting means detects the passing of the game ball, the passage is detected by the second detecting means. Since it assists that the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the game ball is caused to enter the third ball entry means via the second detection means without passing through the sorting means. Is possible. Accordingly, when the game balls are distributed so that the player can reach the sorting means after reducing the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the game is given to the first entrance means and the second entrance means. Since it is unlikely that a ball enters and the game ball enters the third entrance means, only the first symbol can be changed with high probability. In addition, when the game ball is distributed so that the player reaches the distribution means after increasing the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the first entry means, the second entry means, and A game ball enters the third ball entry means, and the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed. Further, when the player distributes the game ball so that the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball after increasing the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the game ball reaches the distribution means. Since the probability is low and the game ball has a high probability of entering the third ball entry means via the second detection means and the auxiliary means, only the second symbol can be changed with a high probability. Therefore, at least three states: a gaming state in which only the first symbol fluctuates with a high probability, a gaming state in which the first symbol and the second symbol fluctuate, and a gaming state in which only the second symbol fluctuates with a high probability. Can be created. As a result, a new gameability can be created by variously combining three game states in which the two symbols change in different proportions.

[Feature I8]
A gaming machine according to Feature I6,
Comprising control means for controlling the gaming machine,
The control means can execute a first control mode (low frequency support mode), a second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high frequency support mode B). ,
In the first control mode,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage has been detected by the first detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage has been detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means,
In the second control mode,
It is possible or easy for the game ball whose passage has been detected by the first detecting means to enter the third entering means with the assistance of the auxiliary means,
It is impossible or difficult for the game ball whose passage has been detected by the second detection means to enter the third ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means,
In the third control mode,
It is possible or easy for the game ball whose passage has been detected by the first detecting means to enter the third entering means with the assistance of the auxiliary means,
A gaming machine characterized in that a game ball whose passage has been detected by the second detecting means can or can easily enter the third entering means with the assistance of the auxiliary means.

  According to the feature I8, the control means can execute three control modes having different difficulty levels (difficulty / ease) of entering the game ball into the third ball entry means. A variety of new game flows can be created using switching.

[Feature I9]
A gaming machine according to feature I8,
The control means includes
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery execution means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the lottery to the output of the lottery result (the fluctuation time of the electric utility release lottery) is the first lottery execution time and the second lottery execution shorter than the first lottery execution time. It can be changed in at least two stages with time,
The auxiliary time, which is the time during which the auxiliary means performs the assistance in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is the first auxiliary time and the second auxiliary time longer than the first auxiliary time. Can be changed in at least two stages,
The first control mode is:
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time;
The second control mode is:
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time;
The third control mode is:
The gaming machine, wherein the winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

  According to the feature I9, by controlling the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time, the difficulty level (difficulty / easiness) of entering the game ball into the third pitching means ) Can be executed in three different control modes, it is possible to realize the creation of various new game flows utilizing the switching of the control modes by relatively easy control.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature J1]
A predetermined ball entry means (second start port 34 in the second embodiment) in which a game ball can enter;
Detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that a game ball has passed through a specific position;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role release lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
An auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting a game ball to enter the ball entry means when the predetermined lottery is won;
A distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths;
A gaming machine comprising
The gaming machine is characterized in that the detection means is arranged on one of the plurality of routes (the right channel R2).

  According to the feature J1, the detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball that triggers execution of a predetermined lottery as to whether or not the assisting means assists the entry of the game ball into the entering means is performed by the distributing means. Since it is arranged on one of the plurality of routes to be distributed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the manner in which the game balls are distributed by the distribution means.

[Feature J2]
A gaming machine according to feature J1,
A first ball entry means (first start port 33b) arranged at a position where the game balls distributed to the one route by the distribution means can be entered when not assisted by the auxiliary means. Prepared,
The ball entry means into which a game ball enters when being assisted by the auxiliary means is a second ball entry means (second start port 34) different from the first ball entry means. To play.

  According to the feature J2, the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game balls distributed to the one route by the distribution means can be entered when not assisted by the auxiliary means. In addition to giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the mode of game ball distribution by the distribution means, if the game balls are distributed to one route, the game balls enter the first ball entry means, or The player can be given an expectation as to whether or not to enter the second entry means with the assistance of the assistance means, and at least two stages of expectation are given to the return of the game ball that has reached the distribution means. be able to.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
Third ball entry means (first start port 33a) arranged at a position where the game balls distributed to the route different from the one route (left channel R1) by the distribution means can enter;
First symbol variation means for varying the first symbol triggered by a game ball entering the first ball entry means and the third ball entry means;
Second symbol variation means for varying the second symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second ball entry means;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature J3, even when the game ball is distributed by the distribution unit, the distributed game ball is input to the third input unit even when the distributed game ball is input to the first input unit. In this case, since the first symbol, which is the same symbol, is changed, a different symbol fluctuates with the entry of the game ball for each of the previous ball pitching means distributed by the sorting means. Unexpectedness can be imparted to a player who has been assumed to be a gaming machine with a simple structure, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature K group>
[Feature K1]
A first distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) that alternately distributes the reached game balls into a first path (left channel R1 in the second embodiment) and a second path (right channel R2);
A second distribution means (ordinary electric accessory 53) that distributes the game balls flowing through the second route into a third route and a fourth route;
A first type of ball entry means (first start port) that triggers a change in the first symbol when a game ball enters;
A second-type ball entry means (second start port) that causes the game ball to enter when the second symbol fluctuates;
With
The first type ball entry means is disposed at a position where game balls that have circulated through the first route and the third route can enter,
The second type ball entry means is disposed at a position where a game ball that has circulated through the fourth route can enter,
The second distribution means controls the probability that game balls are distributed to the fourth route so as to be changeable.

  According to the feature K1, since the probability that the second distribution unit distributes the game ball to the fourth route can be changed, the game that the first distribution unit has reached has been provided. Even in the case of alternately distributing the balls to the first route and the second route, by changing the probability that the second distribution means distributes the game balls to the fourth route, the first symbol and The changing ratio with the second symbol can be changed. For example, when the probability that the second allocating unit distributes the game balls to the fourth route is set low, the game balls distributed to the first route by the first allocating unit are used as the first type ball entering unit. And the first symbol is changed. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the second route can be distributed to the third route with high probability by the second distribution unit and can enter the first type ball input unit to change the first symbol. . That is, the game ball that has reached the first distribution means can be made to enter the first type entry means with a high probability, and the first symbol can be changed. In addition, when the probability that the second distribution means distributes the game balls to the fourth route is set high, the game balls distributed to the first route by the first distribution means are used as the first type incoming ball means. And the first symbol is changed. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the second route can be distributed to the fourth route with high probability by the second distribution unit and can enter the second type ball input unit to change the second symbol. . In this way, by changing the probability that the second distribution means distributes the game balls to the fourth route, the changing ratio of the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed.

[Feature K2]
A gaming machine according to the feature K1,
The second allocating means (ordinary electric accessory 53) passes through the first allocating means in an aspect (open state) in which the game balls flowing through the second route are distributed to the fourth route (open state). A gaming machine comprising guide means for guiding a game ball that circulates without being directed to the second-type entrance means.

  According to the feature K2, in the aspect in which the game balls that circulate through the second route are distributed to the fourth route, the guidance that guides the game balls that circulate without going through the first distribution means to the second type entry means. Means. Accordingly, the game ball is made to flow into the second type by distributing the game ball in a distribution mode that reaches the second distribution unit that is distributed to the fourth route without passing through the first distribution unit. The probability of entering the means can be increased, and the ratio at which the second symbol fluctuates can be increased as the ratio between the first symbol and the second symbol.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
Detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that a game ball has passed through a predetermined position on the second route;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role release lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
With
The second allocating unit determines whether to distribute the game balls flowing through the second route to the third route or the fourth route based on the result of the predetermined lottery. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature K3, the second distribution means determines whether the game balls distributed through the second route are distributed to the third route or the fourth route based on a predetermined lottery result. Since the determination is made, the player cannot recognize in advance which of the third route and the fourth route the game balls flowing through the second route are distributed. Therefore, the player can make a guess as to the result of the predetermined lottery and whether the game ball circulating in the second route is distributed to the third route or the fourth route. Can be given and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature L group>
[Feature L1]
A first ball entry means (second start port 34 in the second embodiment) into which a game ball can enter;
Detecting means for detecting that the game ball has passed through a predetermined position;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role release lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
An auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting a game ball to enter the first entrance means when the predetermined lottery is won;
Control means for controlling the gaming machine;
With
The control means includes
The winning probability in the predetermined lottery by the lottery execution means can be changed to at least two stages of a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability,
The lottery execution time from the start of the lottery to the output of the lottery result (the fluctuation time of the electric utility release lottery) is the first lottery execution time and the second lottery execution shorter than the first lottery execution time. It can be changed in at least two stages with time,
The auxiliary time, which is the time during which the auxiliary means performs the assistance in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, is the first auxiliary time and the second auxiliary time longer than the first auxiliary time. Can be changed in at least two stages,
As the control mode, a first control mode (low frequency support mode), a second control mode (high frequency support mode A), and a third control mode (high frequency support mode B) can be executed.
The first control mode is:
The winning probability is the first probability, the lottery execution time is the first lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time;
The second control mode is:
The winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time;
The third control mode is:
The gaming machine, wherein the winning probability is the second probability, the lottery execution time is the second lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time.

  According to the feature L1, the control means can switch between three control modes in which the winning probability of the predetermined lottery, the lottery execution time, and the auxiliary time are different. Various game flows can be created.

[Feature L2]
A gaming machine according to feature L1,
A second ball entry means (first start port) that is different from the first ball entry means;
First distribution means for alternately distributing the reached game balls into a first path (left channel R1) and a second path (right channel R2);
With
The second ball entry means is disposed at a position where a game ball that has circulated through the first route and the second route can enter,
The detection means detects that a game ball has passed through the predetermined position on the second route,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the auxiliary means is arranged on a path through which game balls circulate from the second path to the second ball entry means.

  According to the feature L2, the second entry means is configured to change the first route and the second route, even though the assignment unit distributes the game balls alternately to the first route and the second route. Since the distributed game balls are arranged at positions where they can enter, it is possible to cause the player to make various assumptions about the purpose of installing the distribution means and to add unexpectedness. Further, since the auxiliary means assists the game balls distributed to the second route into the first ball entering means, the game balls distributed to the second route by the distribution means are used by the auxiliary means. The player can be paid attention to whether or not it is assisted, and a sense of expectation can be given.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature M1]
A ball entry means (second start port 34 in the second embodiment) into which a game ball can enter,
A distribution means (distribution mechanism 120) for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths;
First detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that a first detection position that is a position on one of the plurality of paths has passed;
Second detection means (through gate 35b) for detecting passing through a second detection position that is different from the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electrical role opening lottery);
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) for assisting the game ball to enter the ball entry means,
With
The lottery execution means
The predetermined lottery is executed when the first detection means detects the passage of the game ball,
The predetermined lottery is executed when the second detecting means detects the passing of the game ball,
A lottery mode in which the lottery execution time is Tp from the time when the first detecting means or the second detecting means detects the passing of the game ball to the time when the predetermined lottery is started and the lottery result is output. Prepared,
The auxiliary means includes
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game ball that has passed the first detection position is assisted to enter the entry means,
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game ball that has passed the second detection position is assisted to enter the entry means,
When the predetermined lottery is won, the time from the time when the lottery result is output until the time when the auxiliary means becomes the assistable state is Tm,
When the assistance is performed in response to one winning of the predetermined lottery, the assistance mode in which the assistance time, which is the assistance time, is the first assistance time Ts1, and the assistance time is the first assistance time. An auxiliary mode having a second auxiliary time Ts2 longer than Ts1,
The time from the time when the game ball passes the first detection position to the time when it reaches the auxiliary means is Tr1, and the time from the time when the game ball passes the second detection position to the time when it reaches the auxiliary means is set as Tr1. Tr2
The time from when the game ball that has passed through the first detection position reaches the auxiliary means to the time when it enters the ball entry means with the assistance of the auxiliary means is Tf1, and the game ball that has passed through the second detection position is When the time from reaching the auxiliary means to entering the ball entry means with assistance from the auxiliary means is Tf2,
Tp + Tm ≦ Tr1
Tp + Tm ≦ Tr2
Tr1 + Tf1 ≦ Tp + Tm + Ts1 <Tr2 + Tf2 ≦ Tp + Tm + Ts2
A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature M1, the auxiliary means includes an auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, and an auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2. In the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the first auxiliary time Ts1, when the game ball is distributed so as to pass through the first detection position, that is, the game ball is distributed so as to reach the distribution means. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the entrance means by the assistance of the assist means. However, when the game ball is circulated through the second detection position, the game ball enters the entrance means. Since the assisting by the assisting means ends before entering the ball, the game ball cannot enter the entering means. Therefore, in consideration of a distribution mode of game balls that is advantageous for the player, in the assist mode in which the assist time is the first assist time Ts1, the first detection position is passed (the distribution means is reached). As described above, the distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed is a more advantageous distribution mode of the game balls for the player than the distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the second detection position.

  On the other hand, in the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2, the game ball passes through the first detection position and the game ball passes through the second detection position. In any case, the game ball can be entered into the entrance means with the assistance of the assistance means. However, when the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the first detection position, the game balls pass through the sorting means, and therefore, only the game balls distributed to one route among the game balls that have reached the sorting means. The first detection position cannot be passed. Therefore, the ratio of the number of game balls entering the ball entry means through the first detection position with respect to the number of game balls reaching the distribution means when the game balls are distributed so as to reach the distribution means Is a game ball that passes through the second detection position and enters the ball entry means with respect to the number of game balls that have reached the second detection position when the game ball is distributed so as to pass through the second detection position. It becomes lower than the ratio of the number. Accordingly, in consideration of a distribution mode of game balls that is advantageous to the player, in the auxiliary mode in which the auxiliary time is the second auxiliary time Ts2, a distribution mode that distributes the game balls so as to pass through the second detection position. This is a game ball distribution mode that is more advantageous to the player than a distribution mode in which the game balls are distributed so as to pass through the first detection position (so as to reach the sorting means).

  Therefore, by switching the auxiliary mode by the auxiliary means, it is possible to change the distribution mode of the game balls that is advantageous for the player in the distribution mode in which the game balls enter the incoming ball means with the assistance of the auxiliary means. New game characteristics can be created, and the player can be actively participated in a change operation of the distribution mode of the game balls, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature N group>
The feature N group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature N1]
Distributing means (distributing mechanism 120) that alternately distributes the arrived game balls to the first guide path (the left channel R1 in Modification 5 of the second embodiment) and the second guide path (the right channel R2). )When,
A ball entry part (first start port 33a in the modified example 5 of the second embodiment) into which a game ball can enter,
With
The gaming machine characterized in that the first guidance route and the second guidance route both guide the game ball to the same entrance portion.

  According to the feature N1, the game balls distributed to the first guide route and the game balls distributed to the second guide route are the same even though the game balls are distributed by the distributing unit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player make various assumptions about the purpose of installing the distribution means and to add unexpectedness.

[Feature N2]
A gaming machine according to the feature N1,
In the case where the first entrance path is a first entrance section that is guided by both the first and second guide paths, the entrance section into which a game ball can enter and A second entrance part (second start port 34) different from the entrance part 1;
First detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that a game ball has passed a first detection position which is a predetermined position on the second guide route;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery triggered by the fact that the first detection means detects passage of the game ball;
Auxiliary means (ordinary electric accessory 53) arranged on a route through which game balls circulate from the second guidance route to the first entrance part, and when the predetermined lottery is won, Auxiliary means for assisting a game ball that has reached the auxiliary means to enter the second incoming portion;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature N2, a part of the game balls distributed to the second guide route can be entered into the second entrance part. Therefore, by controlling the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, the relative ratio between the number of game balls entering the first entrance and the number of game balls entering the second entrance is controlled. be able to.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine described in feature N2,
A second detection means (through gate 35b) for detecting that the second detection position that is different from the position where the distribution means is provided and the first detection position is passed;
The lottery execution means executes the predetermined lottery when the second detection means detects passage of the game ball,
The auxiliary means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming ball that has passed through the second detection position is disposed at a position where it can be reached.

  According to the feature N3, when the game ball is circulated so as to pass through the second detection position without passing through the position at which the distributing means is provided and the first detection position, the game is played only in the second entrance portion. A ball can be entered.

<Feature O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature O1]
Distribution area where game balls circulate,
Distribution route changing means (ordinary electric accessory 53 in the third modification of the second embodiment) that is arranged in the distribution region and changes the distribution route through which game balls can be distributed;
With
The distribution route changing means is
In the first state (closed state), the first distribution path (path from the right flow path R2 to the second start port 34) through which the game ball can flow is shielded and the game ball can flow through. 2 distribution route (route from the wall W to the second start port 34),
In the second state (open state), the shielding of the first distribution route is released and the second distribution route is formed.

  According to the characteristic O1, the distribution route changing unit can change the two distribution routes by shifting from the first state to the second state. That is, the distribution route changing means can change the states of the two types of distribution routes simultaneously with one state change. As a result, it is possible to execute a game using the distribution route changing means in both cases where the game balls are distributed through the first distribution route and where the game balls are distributed through the second distribution route. .

[Feature O2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic O1,
A lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electrical role opening lottery);
The distribution route changing means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, the gaming machine shifts from the first state to the second state.

  According to the feature O2, since the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state when a predetermined lottery is won, the player is given a sense of expectation regarding the lottery result of the predetermined lottery. can do. Further, by controlling the winning probability of a predetermined lottery, the probability and frequency of changing the first distribution route and the second distribution route can be controlled.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine according to feature O2,
First detection means (through gate) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a first position on the first distribution path and upstream of the distribution path change means with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball. 35a)
Second detection means (through gate) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a second position on the second distribution route and upstream of the distribution route change means and upstream of the distribution direction of the game ball. 35b)
The lottery execution means
The predetermined lottery is executed when the first detection means detects the passage of the game ball,
The predetermined lottery is executed when the second detection means detects the passage of the game ball.

  According to the feature O3, since a predetermined lottery is executed when the game ball passes the first position or the second position, various game characteristics can be created using the property. For example, depending on the state of the game, it is controlled so that it is advantageous for the player to pass the game ball to the first position, or the player who passes the game ball to the second position By controlling so as to be advantageous to the player, it is possible to make the player have a gameability that promotes a change in the distribution mode of the game balls, and to promote the active participation in the game.

[Feature O4]
A gaming machine described in feature O3,
The distribution route changing means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, the first circulation in which the game ball that has passed through the first position and the opportunity for the winning is released by the distribution path changing means The gaming machine is characterized in that it shifts from the first state to the second state at a timing when the route can be distributed.

  According to the characteristic O4, the game ball is passed to the first position and a predetermined lottery is won, and the distribution route changing means is shifted from the first state to the second state, and the shielding of the first distribution route is released. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress an event that the game ball cannot be distributed to the first distribution route during the period in which the shielding is released and the player's expectation is lowered.

[Feature O5]
A gaming machine according to feature O3 or feature O4,
The distribution route changing means is
When the predetermined lottery is won, the game ball that has passed through the second position and is the trigger for the winning is passed through the second distribution route formed by the distribution route changing means. The gaming machine is characterized in that it shifts from the first state to the second state at a time when it can be distributed.

  According to the feature O5, the game ball is passed to the second position and a predetermined lottery is won, and the distribution route changing means shifts from the first state to the second state to form the second distribution route. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress an event in which the game ball cannot be distributed to the second distribution route during the period in which the second distribution route is formed and the player's expectation is lowered.

[Feature O6]
A gaming machine according to features O1 to O5,
It is arranged at a specific position in the circulation area, and has a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter,
The specific position is
On the first distribution route and at a position downstream of the distribution route changing means with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball, and on the second distribution route and from the distribution route changing means Is a downstream position with respect to the distribution direction of the game balls.

  According to the characteristic O6, the position is on the first distribution path and is located downstream of the distribution path changing means with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball, and on the second distribution path and the distribution path is changed. Since the ball entrance means is provided at a position downstream of the means with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball, when the distribution path changing means shifts from the first state to the second state, Is likely to enter the game, which can increase the player's expectation.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature P1]
A first type of ball entry means (first start port 33b in the second embodiment), in which a game ball is entered when the first symbol fluctuates,
A second-type ball entry means (second start port 34) that triggers a change in the second symbol different from the first symbol in which the game ball enters;
A distribution means (ordinary electric accessory 53) that distributes the game balls that have arrived, and when it does not operate, a game ball that circulates in a predetermined position enters the first type entry means and operates. , A distribution means for causing the game balls that circulate through the predetermined position to enter the second type entry means,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the characteristic P1, the game balls that arrive after the game balls that have reached the sorting means are different depending on whether or not the sorting means is operated, and the ball entering means to be different are different. It can be noted whether or not the distribution means operates.

[Feature P2]
A gaming machine according to feature P1,
Detection means (through gate 35a) for detecting that a game ball has passed through a specific position;
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery (electric role release lottery) triggered by the detection means detecting passage of the game ball;
With
The distribution means operates when the predetermined lottery is won.

  According to the feature P2, since the distribution means operates when a predetermined lottery is won, it is possible to control the frequency at which the distribution means operates by controlling the winning probability in the predetermined lottery. Yes, as a result, it is possible to control the rate at which the first symbol and the second symbol are varied.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P2,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific position is a position at which a game ball that has passed the specific position can reach the distribution means.

  According to the feature P3, the specific position is a position at which the game ball that has passed the specific position can reach the distribution means. Therefore, for the player who has a sense of expectation for the operation of the distribution means, It can also be noted whether or not the game ball passes through the position. Therefore, it is possible to focus on whether or not the game ball passes through a specific position, and then focus on how the game ball that has passed the specific position is distributed by the distribution means, and the game ball is distributed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in a step-by-step manner.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
The first type of ball entry means (first start port in the second embodiment) that the game ball enters when the first symbol fluctuates,
A second-type ball entry means (second start port in the second embodiment) that triggers a change in the second symbol different from the first symbol in which the game ball enters;
Control means for controlling the gaming state;
With
The control means includes
When a game ball is distributed in a distribution manner that is most advantageous to the player, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the first type entry means is the first type entry means continuous entry probability, and the game ball Is the probability of alternately entering the first-type entrance means and the second-type entrance means, and the probability of the game ball entering the second-type entrance means is second. In the case of the seed entry means continuous entry probability,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the first-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the alternate entry probability and the second-type entry means continuous entry probability;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) in which the alternately entering probability is higher than the first type entrance means continuous entrance probability and the second type entrance means continuous entrance probability;
A third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the first-type entry means continuous entry probability and the alternate entry probability;
A gaming machine comprising game state switching means for controlling the game to be switchable.

  According to the feature Q1, the control means controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state so as to be switchable. Therefore, by combining the three gaming states, A variety of new game flows can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature Q2]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the first-type incoming ball means and the second-type incoming ball means;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
Production execution means for performing production,
With
The production execution means
The special information corresponding to the game times executed in the second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) satisfies the predetermined condition, and corresponds to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Specified when the game times executed after the game times are executed in the second game state (when the lottery result of the winning lottery in the first start opening game times of the high-frequency support mode A is a big hit A) A gaming machine comprising means for executing

  According to the characteristic Q2, when the game times executed after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition in the second game state are executed in the second game state, a specific effect is executed. Therefore, it can be suggested that the second gaming state continues to the player via the specific performance. In addition, in the second gaming state, the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions are executed, and the player recognizes that the special information corresponding to the game times being executed satisfies the predetermined conditions. In this case, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed, and it is possible to maintain the player's concentration on the game.

[Feature Q3]
A gaming machine according to feature Q2,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific effect is an effect suggesting that the current gaming state is maintained.

  According to the feature Q3, when the game times executed after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition in the second game state are executed in the second game state, the current game state is Since the performance suggesting that it will be maintained is executed, it is possible to provoke a sense of relief for the player and a desire to shift to a more advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game .

[Feature Q4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3,
The second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the first gaming state (low frequency support mode),
The third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) is a more advantageous game state for the player than the second gaming state (high frequency support mode A).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Q4, since the three gaming states having a difference in the degree of advantage for the player are controlled so as to be switchable, an inflection can be given to the player's expectation by switching the gaming state, It is possible to improve the interest of games.

<Feature R group>
The feature R group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature R1]
The first type of ball entry means (first start port in the second embodiment) that the game ball enters when the first symbol fluctuates,
A second-type ball entry means (second start port in the second embodiment) that triggers a change in the second symbol different from the first symbol in which the game ball enters;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the first-type incoming ball means and the second-type incoming ball means;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
A variation time determining means for determining a variation time which is a time from the start to the end of one variation of each symbol of the first symbol and the second symbol in the game times;
Control means for controlling the gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising
The variation time determining means includes
A gaming state in which the probability that a game ball alternately enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means is higher than the probability that a game ball continuously enters the same entrance means (High frequency support mode A)
The value of the variation time of the game times corresponding to the special information when the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first type entry means satisfies the predetermined condition ( And the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first-type entry means is the predetermined value. If the above condition is not satisfied, the value of the variation time of the game times corresponding to the special information (the value of the variation time of the first start opening game times in which the lottery result of the winning lottery is out) is the same or A gaming machine comprising means for determining substantially the same value.

  According to the feature R1, the probability that the game ball alternately enters the first and second type entrance means is greater than the probability that the game ball continuously enters the same entrance means. In the high gaming state, the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first type entry means corresponds to the special information between when the predetermined condition is satisfied and when the special information is not satisfied. Since the variation times of the game times to be performed are the same or substantially the same, it is possible to prevent the special information from paying attention to the result of the determination as to whether or not the predetermined information is satisfied. Therefore, for example, the probability that a game ball enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means alternately is higher than the probability that the game balls enter the same entrance means continuously. In the gaming state, when the game times executed due to the game balls entering the first type entry means are game times that are disadvantageous to the player, the determination of the game times is made. Since it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation during the period in which the game round is being executed.

[Feature R2]
A gaming machine according to feature R1,
A variable time random number acquisition means for acquiring a variable time random number used when determining the variable time;
A variable time table in which a value of each variable time random number and variable time information that is information that can specify the time length of the variable time are recorded correspondingly,
With
The variation time determining means includes
A gaming state in which the probability that a game ball alternately enters the first-type entrance means and the second-type entrance means is lower than the probability that a game ball continuously enters the same entrance means In the alternating pitch low probability gaming state (low frequency support mode or high frequency support mode B),
A case in which the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition when determining a variation time in the game times to be executed due to the game balls entering the type 1 ball entry means; Use different variable time table depending on when not satisfying
A gaming state in which the probability that a game ball alternately enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means is higher than the probability that a game ball continuously enters the same entrance means In the alternate pitch high probability gaming state (high frequency support mode A),
When the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition when determining the variation time in the game times executed due to the game balls entering the first type ball entry means A game machine characterized by using the same variable time table when not satisfying.

  According to the feature R2, in the alternate entry low probability game state, when determining the variation time in the game times executed due to the entry of the game balls into the type 1 entry means, When the corresponding special information satisfies the predetermined condition and when it does not satisfy the predetermined time, using different variation time tables, in the high-probability game state in which alternately entering the ball, due to the entry of the game ball to the first-type entry means When determining the variation time in the game times executed in this way, the same variation time table is used depending on whether the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition or not. In other words, in the alternate entry low probability game state, the special information corresponding to the first type entry means provides a change in the variation time between the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied and the case where the special information is not satisfied. In the entering high probability gaming state, the variation time is not changed between the case where the special information corresponding to the first type entry means satisfies the predetermined condition and the case where the special information does not satisfy the predetermined information. By doing in this way, it is determined whether or not the special information corresponding to the first type ball entry means satisfies or does not satisfy the predetermined information between the alternating ball low probability game state and the alternating ball high probability game state. It is possible to make a difference in the degree to which the player pays attention to the result. In the alternate entry low probability gaming state, the special information corresponding to the first type entry means is changed in the variation time between when the predetermined condition is satisfied and when the predetermined information is not satisfied. Can be noticed about. In the alternate pitch high probability gaming state, since the special information corresponding to the first type pitching means does not change the variation time between when the predetermined condition is satisfied and when the predetermined information is not satisfied, You can avoid paying attention to the results. Therefore, it is possible to change the player's degree of attention with respect to the game times resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first type entry means between the alternately entered low probability game state and the alternately entered high probability game state. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention and expectation of the player's game.

  In addition, in the alternate pitch high probability game state, when determining the variation time in the game times executed due to the game balls entering the first type ball entry means, the special times corresponding to the game times are determined. Since the same variable time table is used when the information satisfies the predetermined condition and when the information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the variable time table is different depending on whether the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition or not. Compared with the case of determining the variation time, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the variation time table and simplify the processing when determining the variation time.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
A game ball has entered the second type entry means rather than a game time (first start opening game number) being executed due to the game ball entering the first type entry means. Therefore, the game machine is characterized in that it is advantageous for the player to execute the game round (second start opening game round).

  According to the feature R3, the game ball is entered into the second type entry means, rather than the game round is executed due to the game ball entering the first type entry means. Thus, it is configured that it is advantageous for the player to execute the game times. Therefore, the player expects the game times due to the game balls entering the second type entrance means and expects the game times due to the game balls entering the first type entrance means. do not do. However, in the alternate entry low probability gaming state, since the variation time of the game times due to the game ball entering the first type entry means is changed according to the determination result, the first type It is possible to make the player pay attention to the determination result of the game times resulting from the game ball entering the ball entry means. On the other hand, in the alternate entrance high probability game state, the variation time of the game times due to the game ball entering the first type entry means is not changed according to the determination result. It is possible to suppress the player from paying attention to the determination result of the game times caused by the game ball entering the seed entry means. Therefore, in the alternating pitch high probability gaming state, the degree of attention of the determination result of the game times that is not advantageous to the player can be reduced, and the degree of attention of the determination result of the game times that is advantageous to the player can be increased. As a result, a decrease in the player's expectation can be suppressed.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3,
The control means includes
When a game ball is distributed in a distribution manner that is most advantageous to the player, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the first type entry means is the first type entry means continuous entry probability, and the game ball Is the probability of alternately entering the first-type entrance means and the second-type entrance means, and the probability of the game ball entering the second-type entrance means is second. In the case of the seed entry means continuous entry probability,
The control means includes
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the first-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the alternate entry probability and the second-type entry means continuous entry probability;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) in which the alternately entering probability is higher than the first type entrance means continuous entrance probability and the second type entrance means continuous entrance probability;
A third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the first-type entry means continuous entry probability and the alternate entry probability;
A gaming machine comprising game state switching means for controlling the game to be switchable.

  According to the feature R4, the control means controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state so as to be switchable. Therefore, by combining the three gaming states, A variety of new game flows can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature S1]
The first type of ball entry means (first start port in the second embodiment) that the game ball enters when the first symbol fluctuates,
A second-type ball entry means (second start port in the second embodiment) that triggers a change in the second symbol different from the first symbol in which the game ball enters;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the first-type incoming ball means and the second-type incoming ball means;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
A variation time determining means for determining a variation time that is a time from the start to the end of one variation of each symbol of the first symbol and the second symbol;
A gaming machine comprising
A game ball has entered the second type entry means rather than a game time (first start opening game number) being executed due to the game ball entering the first type entry means. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player that the game times (second start opening game times) are executed,
The variation time determining means includes
A gaming state in which the probability that a game ball alternately enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means is higher than the probability that a game ball continuously enters the same entrance means (High frequency support mode A)
The average of the variation times of the game times corresponding to the special information when the special information acquired due to the game ball entering the first type ball entry means does not satisfy the predetermined condition The special information obtained as a result of the value (the average value of the variation time of the first start opening game times in which the lottery result of the winning lottery is out) is attributed to the entry of the game ball into the second type entry means When the game does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the average value of the variation times of the game times corresponding to the special information (the average value of the variation times of the second start opening game times in which the lottery result of the winning lottery is out) The game machine is characterized in that the variation time is determined to be shorter.

  In the gaming state, the probability that the game ball alternately enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means is higher than the probability that the game balls enter the same entrance means continuously. A game time (hereinafter also referred to as a first type game time) executed due to a game ball entering the first type ball entry means is entered into the second type ball entry means. The game is often recalled to be more disadvantageous than the game times that are executed (also referred to as second type game times), and the player's expectation during the execution of the first type game times May be reduced.

  According to the feature S1, the probability that the game ball alternately enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means is greater than the probability that the game balls enter the same entrance means continuously. In the higher gaming state, the average value of the variation time of the game times when the special information corresponding to the first type game times does not satisfy the predetermined condition is the special information corresponding to the second type game times. Since the variation time is determined so as to be shorter than the average value of the variation times of the game times when the condition is not satisfied, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation during the period in which the first type game times are being executed. can do. Then, the degree of attention of the determination result of the first type game times that is not advantageous to the player is lowered relative to the degree of attention of the determination result of the second type game times that is advantageous to the player. The attention level of the determination result of the advantageous second type game times can be relatively increased with respect to the attention level of the determination result of the first type game times that is not advantageous to the player.

[Feature S2]
A gaming machine according to the feature S1,
The variation time determining means includes
The game has a higher probability that a game ball will alternately enter the first-type and second-type entrance means than a probability that a game ball will continuously enter the same entrance means. In the state (high frequency support mode A),
The average value of the variation times of the game times corresponding to the special information when the special information acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first type entry means satisfies the predetermined condition (The average value of the variation time of the first start opening game times in which the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit) is obtained as a result of the entry of the game ball into the second type entry means. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variation time of the game times corresponding to the special information is shorter than the average value (average value of the variation times of the second start opening game times where the lottery result of the winning lottery is a big hit). The game machine is characterized in that the variation time is determined as follows.

  According to the feature S2, the probability that the game ball alternately enters the first and second type entrance means is greater than the probability that the game ball continuously enters the same entrance means. In the higher gaming state, when the special information corresponding to the first type game times satisfies the predetermined condition, the average value of the variation time of the game times is the special information corresponding to the second type game times. Since the variation time is determined so as to be shorter than the average value of the variation times of the game times in the case of satisfying, the player's sense of expectation is further suppressed during the period in which the first type game times are being executed. can do. Then, the degree of attention of the determination result of the first type game times that is not advantageous to the player is further lowered relative to the degree of attention of the determination result of the second type game times that is advantageous to the player. The degree of attention of the determination result of the second type game times that is advantageous to the player can be further increased relative to the degree of attention of the determination result of the first type game times that is not advantageous to the player.

[Feature S3]
A gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2,
Comprising control means for controlling the gaming state;
The control means includes
The gaming state is
A gaming state in which the probability that a game ball alternately enters the first-type entrance means and the second-type entrance means is lower than the probability that a game ball continuously enters the same entrance means (Low frequency support mode or high frequency support mode B),
A gaming state in which the probability that a game ball alternately enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means is higher than the probability that a game ball continuously enters the same entrance means (High frequency support mode A),
A game machine, characterized by comprising state transition means for controlling to be able to shift to.

  The game state in which the probability that the game ball alternately enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means is higher than the probability that the game ball continuously enters the same entrance means, It is a state that frequently reminds that the first type game times are relatively disadvantageous with respect to the second type game times, and the game balls are alternately turned into the first type ball entering means and the second type ball entering means. In a gaming state in which the probability of entering is lower than the probability that the game ball will continuously enter the same entry means, the first type game times are relatively disadvantageous to the second type game times. It is in a state that is difficult to recall.

  According to the feature S3, the probability that the game ball alternately enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means is greater than the probability that the game ball continuously enters the same entrance means. Can be shifted to a lower gaming state, which means that it is possible to shift to a state in which it is difficult to recall that the type 1 gaming times are relatively disadvantageous to the type 2 gaming times, Decreasing the sense of expectation can be further suppressed.

<Feature T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature T1]
The first type of ball entry means (first start port in the second embodiment) that the game ball enters when the first symbol fluctuates,
A second-type ball entry means (second start port in the second embodiment) that triggers a change in the second symbol different from the first symbol in which the game ball enters;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the first-type incoming ball means and the second-type incoming ball means;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
Control means for controlling the gaming state;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The probability that a game ball will alternately enter the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means is greater than the probability that the game ball will enter the first type entrance means continuously. In the high gaming state (high frequency support mode A),
The production execution means
Means for executing a first effect (an effect attacked by an enemy character) in a game time (first start game time) executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entry means. When,
In the game times (second start opening game times) executed due to the game balls entering the second type entry means, a second effect (player side) different from the first effect is provided. A game machine characterized by comprising: a means for performing a character attack).

  According to the feature T1, the probability that the game ball enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means alternately enters the first type entrance means continuously. In a gaming state higher than the probability, the first effect is executed in the game times executed due to the entry of the game ball into the first type entry means, and the game balls to the second type entry means are executed. Since the second effect is executed in the game times executed due to the entry, it is easy for the player to recognize which entry means the game times are caused by the game balls entering. Can assist the player in understanding the flow of the game.

[Feature T2]
A gaming machine according to feature T1,
A game ball has entered the second type entry means rather than a game time (first start opening game number) being executed due to the game ball entering the first type entry means. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to execute the game times (second start opening game times)
The first effect is an effect suggesting that the player is in an unfavorable situation,
The second effect is an effect suggesting that the player is in an advantageous situation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature T2, the probability that a game ball will alternately enter the first-type entrance means and the second-type entrance means will successively enter the first-type entrance means. In a gaming state higher than the probability, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether the game time being executed is a game time advantageous to the player or a game time disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to further assist in understanding the flow of games.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
The control means includes
When a game ball is distributed in a distribution manner that is most advantageous to the player, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the first type entry means is the first type entry means continuous entry probability, and the game ball Is the probability of alternately entering the first-type entrance means and the second-type entrance means, and the probability of the game ball entering the second-type entrance means is second. In the case of the seed entry means continuous entry probability,
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the first-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the alternate entry probability and the second-type entry means continuous entry probability;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) in which the alternately entering probability is higher than the first type entrance means continuous entrance probability and the second type entrance means continuous entrance probability;
A third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the first-type entry means continuous entry probability and the alternate entry probability;
A gaming machine comprising game state switching means for controlling the game to be switchable.

  According to the feature T3, the control unit controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state so as to be switchable. By combining the three gaming states, A variety of new game flows can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to feature T3,
The second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the first gaming state (low frequency support mode),
The third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) is a more advantageous game state for the player than the second gaming state (high frequency support mode A).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature T4, since the three gaming states having a difference in the degree of advantage for the player are controlled to be switchable, an inflection can be given to the player's expectation by switching the gaming state, It is possible to improve the interest of games.

<Feature U group>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature U1]
The first type of ball entry means (first start port in the second embodiment) that the game ball enters when the first symbol fluctuates,
A second-type ball entry means (second start port in the second embodiment) that triggers a change in the second symbol different from the first symbol in which the game ball enters;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the first-type incoming ball means and the second-type incoming ball means;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
Control means for controlling the gaming state;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where game balls are distributed in a distribution manner that is most advantageous to the player,
The probability that the game ball continuously enters the second type entrance means is the probability that the game ball continuously enters the first type entrance means and the game ball is the first type entrance means. In the gaming state (high frequency support mode B), which is higher than the probability of alternately entering the second-type entry means,
The production execution means
When a game time (first start opening game time) is executed due to the game ball entering the first type ball entry means, it is possible to shift to a game state that is more disadvantageous than the current game state. A game machine characterized by performing a production suggesting that there is a characteristic.

  According to the characteristic U1, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the second type entrance means, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the first type entrance means, and the game ball enters the first type When a game round is executed due to the entry of a game ball into the first type entry means in a gaming state where the probability of alternately entering the ball means and the second type entry means is higher Since the effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the game state may be shifted to an unfavorable game state than the current game state is executed, whether the game times to be executed are advantageous or unfavorable in a complex game state. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize and further assist the player's understanding of the game flow.

[Feature U2]
A gaming machine according to feature U1,
A game ball has entered the second type entry means rather than a game time (first start opening game number) being executed due to the game ball entering the first type entry means. Therefore, the game machine is characterized in that it is advantageous for the player to execute the game round (second start opening game round).

  According to the characteristic U2, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the second type entrance means, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the first type entrance means, and the game ball enters the first type In a gaming state that is higher than the probability of alternately entering the ball means and the second type entry means, the probability that the game times resulting from the entry of the game balls into the first type entry means is low. In other words, there is a low probability of being in a disadvantageous state for the player. In such a game state, when a game turn is executed due to the entry of the game ball into the first type entry means, there is a possibility that the game state may be shifted to a disadvantageous state compared to the current game state. Since the effect that suggests a certain situation is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether the game times to be executed are advantageous or disadvantageous in a complicated gaming state, and the flow of the player's game It can help further understanding.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to Feature U1 or Feature U2,
The control means includes
In the case where game balls are distributed in a distribution manner that is most advantageous to the player,
The probability that the game ball continuously enters the first type entrance means is the probability that the game ball enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means alternately and the game ball is A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) higher than the probability of continuously entering the second type of ball entry means;
The probability that a game ball will alternately enter the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means is the probability that the game ball will enter the first type entrance means and the game ball A second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) having a higher probability of continuously entering the second-type entry means;
The probability that the game ball continuously enters the second type entrance means is the probability that the game ball continuously enters the first type entrance means and the game ball is the first type entrance means. A third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) that is higher than the probability of alternately entering the second-type entry means;
A gaming machine comprising game state switching means for controlling the game to be switchable.

  According to the feature U3, the control unit controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state so as to be switchable. By combining the three gaming states, A variety of new game flows can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved. In this way, when the game times are executed due to the entry of the game balls into the first type entry means while the three game states are switched, it is disadvantageous whether the game times to be executed are advantageous. This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether this is the case, and can further assist the player in understanding the game flow.

[Feature U4]
A gaming machine described in feature U3,
The second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the first gaming state (low frequency support mode),
The third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) is a more advantageous game state for the player than the second gaming state (high frequency support mode A).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature U4, since the three gaming states having a difference in the degree of advantage for the player are controlled so as to be switchable, an inflection can be given to the player's expectation by switching the gaming state, It is possible to improve the interest of games.

<Feature V group>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature V1]
The first type of ball entry means (first start port in the second embodiment) that the game ball enters when the first symbol fluctuates,
A second-type ball entry means (second start port in the second embodiment) that triggers a change in the second symbol different from the first symbol in which the game ball enters;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the first-type incoming ball means and the second-type incoming ball means;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
Control means for controlling the gaming state;
Production execution means for performing production,
A gaming machine comprising
The probability that a game ball will alternately enter the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means is greater than the probability that the game ball will enter the first type entrance means continuously. In the high gaming state (high frequency support mode A),
The production execution means
When a game ball enters the first type entrance means twice in succession, it is executed due to the game balls entering the first type entrance means twice. A game characterized by comprising means for executing a specific effect (continuous effect in the second embodiment) in at least one of the two consecutive game times (first start game time). Machine.

  According to the feature V1, the probability that the game ball enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means alternately enters the first type entrance means continuously. In a gaming state that is higher than the probability, a specific effect is executed when the player enters the first-type entering means twice in succession. It is possible to recognize that an event with a low probability of entering the seeding ball means twice in succession has occurred, and to raise the player's curiosity for the occurrence of an event with a low probability of occurring. Can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature V2]
A gaming machine according to feature V1,
The specific effect (continuous effect of the second embodiment) is that the probability that the game ball will alternately enter the first type and second type of ball entering means is higher than that of the game ball. In the gaming state (high frequency support mode A) that is higher than the probability of consecutively entering the first-type incoming ball means, the game balls alternately enter the first-type incoming ball means and the second-type incoming ball means. A game machine characterized by having an effect different from an effect executed in a game round executed due to the game ball entering the first type entry means when entering.

  According to the feature V2, the specific effect is that the game ball enters the first type entrance means when the game ball enters the first type entrance means and the second type entrance means alternately. This is an effect different from the effect executed in the game run that is caused by this, so that the player can be made to recognize that an event with a low probability has occurred, and an event with a low probability will occur. It is possible to further raise the curiosity of the player with respect to the event, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
The specific effect is a series of effects (continuous effects) straddling two consecutive game times executed due to the game balls entering the first-type ball entry means twice. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature V3, the specific performance is a series of performances straddling two consecutive game times executed due to the game balls entering the first-type ball entry means twice in succession. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect with a flow across two game times as the content of the specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player further recognize that the situation is a special situation when an event having a low probability of occurring has occurred.

[Feature V4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3,
The control means includes
When a game ball is distributed in a distribution manner that is most advantageous to the player, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the first type entry means is the first type entry means continuous entry probability, and the game ball Is the probability of alternately entering the first-type entrance means and the second-type entrance means, and the probability of the game ball entering the second-type entrance means is second. In the case of the seed entry means continuous entry probability,
The control means includes
A first gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the first-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the alternate entry probability and the second-type entry means continuous entry probability;
A second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) in which the alternately entering probability is higher than the first type entrance means continuous entrance probability and the second type entrance means continuous entrance probability;
A third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) in which the second-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the first-type entry means continuous entry probability and the alternate entry probability;
A gaming machine comprising game state switching means for controlling the game to be switchable.

  According to the feature V4, the control means controls the three gaming states of the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state so as to be switchable. Therefore, by combining the three gaming states, A variety of new game flows can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature V5]
A gaming machine according to feature V4,
The second gaming state (high frequency support mode A) is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the first gaming state (low frequency support mode),
The third gaming state (high frequency support mode B) is a more advantageous game state for the player than the second gaming state (high frequency support mode A).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature V5, since the three gaming states having a difference in the degree of advantage for the player are controlled so as to be switchable, an inflection can be given to the player's expectation by switching the gaming state, It is possible to improve the interest of games.

  Note that the inventions of the above-described feature group A to feature group V solve the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, there are various structures, controls, effects, etc. for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control Technical improvements have been made from the point of view.

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of games, such as the discovery and suppression of illegal acts by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

  For gaming machines such as those mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired for the purposes of improving gaming, reducing the processing load on gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and providing healthier games. It is rare.

  Note that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the feature A group to the feature V group is appropriately combined may be employed. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: Launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a start entrance ball that is provided in the game area and can enter a game ball flowing down the game area And an acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the start ball entering section. Machine.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: design display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, start means for starting variable display of the plurality of pictures due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of stop operation means A gaming machine comprising stop means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to or after elapse of a predetermined time, and privilege grant means for giving a privilege to the player in accordance with the stopped picture.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and the modifications corresponding to the technical features in each embodiment described in the summary section of the invention are to solve some or all of the above-described problems, or In order to achieve part or all of the effects, replacement or combination can be performed as appropriate. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Production operation button 25 ... Operation handle 30 ... Game board 31 ... guide rail 31a ... inner rail 31b ... outer rail 32 ... general entrance 33 ... first start 34 ... second start 34a ... Electric accessory 34b ... Electrical accessory drive unit 35 ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening / closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive unit 37 ... Special figure unit 37a ... 1st symbol display part 37b ... 2nd symbol display part 37c ... 1st reserved display part 37d ... 2nd reserved display part 38 ... Universal figure unit 39 ... Round display unit 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... Liquid crystal display device 41a ... Display surface 41aL ... Display area 41aS ... Display area 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 45 ... Main display 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 51 .. First control unit 52 ... Second control unit 53 ... Third control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main controller 61 ... Main Control board 63a ... Attack table storage area 63b ... Distribution table storage area 63c ... Reach determination table storage area 63d ... Variation time table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage area 63f .. .Command information storage area 64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Holding information storage area 64c ... Telephone holding area 64d ... Various counter areas 64e ... Various flag storage areas 64f Processing result storage area 67a ... Various detection cells 70 ... Discharge control device 71 ... Discharge device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Sound emission control device 91 ... Sound emission control board 92 ... MPU
93 ... ROM
93a ... Production pattern table storage area 93b ... Fluctuation display pattern table storage area 94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Counter area for lottery 100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
533, 633, 733, 833, 933, 1033, 1233, 1333 ... 1st start port 1410, 1510 ... Electric accessories

Claims (4)

A first type of ball entry means for entering a game ball, which triggers a change in the first symbol;
A second type of ball entry means that triggers a change in a second symbol different from the first symbol in which a game ball enters;
Control means for controlling the gaming state;
With
The control means includes
When a game ball is distributed in a distribution manner that is most advantageous to the player, the probability that the game ball continuously enters the first type entry means is the first type entry means continuous entry probability, and the game ball Is the probability of alternately entering the first-type entrance means and the second-type entrance means, and the probability of the game ball entering the second-type entrance means is second. In the case of the seed entry means continuous entry probability,
A first gaming state in which the first-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the alternate entry probability and the second-type entry means continuous entry probability;
A second gaming state in which the alternate entrance probability is higher than the first type entrance means continuous entrance probability and the second type entrance means continuous entrance probability;
A third gaming state in which the second-type entry means continuous entry probability is higher than the first-type entry means continuous entry probability and the alternate entry probability;
A gaming machine comprising game state switching means for controlling the game to be switchable. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information in response to a game ball entering the first-type incoming ball means and the second-type incoming ball means;
Acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time when the game operation is ended once after the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started;
Production execution means for performing production,
With
The production execution means
The special information corresponding to the game times executed in the second gaming state satisfies the predetermined condition, and is executed after the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined conditions. A gaming machine comprising: means for executing a specific effect when game times are executed in the second gaming state. A gaming machine according to claim 2,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific effect is an effect suggesting that the current gaming state is maintained. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The third gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images